PCS-915 Bus Bar Relay

PCS-915
Centralized Busbar Protection

Instruction Manual
NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Preface
Preface
Introduction
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide
full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment.
Documentation for equipment ordered from NR is dispatched separately from manufactured goods
and may not be received at the same time. Therefore, this guide is provided to ensure that printed
information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the recipient.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of
this manual, and read relevant chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
Health and Safety

The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that
equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of
the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason, only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the
system to which it is being connected;
Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to
isolate, ground, and label it;
Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
practices;
Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Instructions and Warnings

The following indicators and standard definitions are used:
PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection i

Date: 2011-05-24
Preface
DANGER!
It means that death, severe personal injury, or considerable equipment damage will occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.
WARNING!
It means that death, severe personal, or considerable equipment damage could occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.
CAUTION!
It means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety precautions are
disregarded. This particularly applies to damage to the device and to resulting damage of the
protected equipment.
WARNING!
The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing features, please
make sure that the version of this manual is compatible with the product in your hand.
WARNING!
During operation of electrical equipment, certain parts of these devices are under high voltage.
Severe personal injury or significant equipment damage could result from improper behavior.
Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment or in the vicinity of this equipment. These
personnel must be familiar with all warnings and service procedures described in this manual, as
well as safety regulations.
In particular, the general facility and safety regulations for work with high-voltage equipment must
be observed. Noncompliance may result in death, injury, or significant equipment damage.
DANGER!
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.
WARNING!
Exposed terminals
Do not touch the exposed terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage
generated is dangerous
ii PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection

Date: 2011-05-24
Preface
Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. It
takes a few seconds for the voltage to discharge.
CAUTION!
Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed
Operating environment
The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient environment detailed in the
specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that they
conform to the equipment ratings.
Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when DC power to the equipment is on, as this
may cause the equipment to malfunction.
External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
Copyright
Version: R1.00 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
69 Suyuan Avenue. Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China
P/N: EN_YJBH5310.0086.0001 Tel: +86-25-87178185, Fax: +86-25-87178208
Website: www.nrelect.com, www.nari-relays.com
Copyright © NR 2011. All rights reserved Email: NR_TechSupport@nari-relays.com
We reserve all rights to this document and to the information contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and dissemination
to third parties is strictly forbidden except where expressly authorized.
The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically, and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If
nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or improvement are greatly appreciated.
We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.
PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection iii

Date: 2011-05-24
Preface
Documentation Structure
The manual provides a functional and technical description of this relay and a comprehensive set
of instructions for the relay’s use and application.
All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below:
1 Introduction
Briefly introduce the application, functions and features about this relay.
2 Technical Data
Introduce the technical data about this relay, such as electrical specifications, mechanical
specifications, ambient temperature and humidity range, communication port parameters, type
tests, setting ranges and accuracy limits and the certifications that our products have passed.
3 Operation Theory
Introduce a comprehensive and detailed functional description of all protective elements.
4 Supervision
Introduce the automatic self-supervision function of this relay.
5 Meaurement and Recording

Introduce the management function (measurment and recording) of this relay.
6 Hardware
Introduce the main function carried out by each plug-in module of this relay and providing the
definition of pins of each plug-in module.
7 Settings
List settings including system settings, communication settings, label settings, logic links and etc.,
and some notes about the setting application.
8 Human Machine Interface

Introduce the hardware of the human machine interface (HMI) module and a detailed guide for the
user how to use this relay through HMI. It also lists all the information which can be view through
HMI, such as settings, measurements, all kinds of reports etc.
9 Configurable Function
Introduce how to make binary input configuration, binary output configuration and LED indicator
configuration through PCS-PC software.
10 Communication
Introduce the communication port and protocol which this relay can support, IEC60970-5-103,
IEC61850 and DNP3.0 protocols are introduced in details.
iv PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection

Date: 2011-05-24
Preface
11 Installation
Introduce the recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of this relay. A
guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of this relay is also provided, incorporating
earthing recommendations. A typical wiring connection to this relay is indicated.
12 Commissioning
Introduce how to commission this relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of
this relay.
13 Maintenance
A general maintenance policy for this relay is outlined.
14 Decommissioning and Disposal

A general decommissioning and disposal policy for this relay is outlined.
15 Manual Version History

List the instruction manual version and the modification history records.
Typographic and Graphical Conventions
Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can be obviously
derived from the illustration.
The following symbols are used in drawings:
AND gate
OR gate
Comparator
Binary signal via opto-coupler
Input signal from comparator with setting
Input signal of logic setting for function enabling
PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection v

Date: 2011-05-24
Preface
Input of binary signal except those signals via opto-coupler
Input of other signal
Output signal
Time (optional definite-time or inverse-time characteristic)
Timer [delay pickup (10ms), delay dropoff (0ms), non-settable]
Timer (delay pickup, settable)
Timer (delay dropoff, settable)
Timer (delay pickup, delay dropoff, settable)
Timer (inverse-time characteristic)
---xxx is the symbol
vi PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection

Date: 2011-05-24
1 Introduction
1 Introduction
Table of Contents
1 Introduction..................................................................................... 1-a
1.1 Application....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Function ........................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Feature ............................................................................................................. 1-2
1.4 Abbreviation .................................................................................................... 1-3
1.5 Order Information............................................................................................ 1-4
PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection 1-a

Date: 2011-05-25
1 Introduction
1-b PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection

Date: 2011-05-25
1 Introduction
1.1 Application
PCS-915 is a numerical busbar differential protection intended to be used for protecting and
monitoring of various busbar arrangement of various voltage levels. It is capable to protect up to
25 bays including bus coupler/section (it is recommended that the first few bays are connected
with bus coupler/section and the rest bays are feeder bays for the sake of description).
PCS-915 utilizes NR’s innovative hardware platform supporting both conventional CT/VT and
electronic current and voltage transformer (ECVT). It is compliant to several communication
protocol, such as IEC60870-5-103, IEC61850 and DNP3.0.
Note!
The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings and
sampled values related with each bay and busbar will change with the corresponding label
settings.
In this instruction manual, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding
busbar and “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay. For a bus
coupler bay, “@BCy” is also used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus coupler.
For a bus section bay, “@BSz” is also used to refer to the label setting of corresponding
bus section.
For example, the tripping signal of ground overcurrent protection of bay 02 can be
described as “50/51G.Op_Trp@Bay02”, if the label setting of bay 02 i.e. [Name_Bay02] is
set as “Fdr01”, the displayed tripping signal of ground overcurrent protection of bay 02 is
[50/51G.Op_TrpFdr01]. If [Name_Bay02] is set as “BC1”, the displayed tripping signal of
ground overcurrent protection of bay 02 is [50/51G.Op_TrpBC1]. Please refer to Section
“Label Settings” in Chapter 7 for details.
1.2 Function
PCS-915 provides the following functions
1. Protection function
Busbar differential protection (87B)
Steady-state percentage restraint differential protection
DPFC percentage restraint differential protection
Bus coupler protection
Breaker failure protection (50BF)
End zone fault protection (50DZ)
Pole disagreement protection (62PD)
PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection 1-1

Date: 2011-05-25
1 Introduction
Switch-onto-fault protection (50SOTF)
Overcurrent protection (50/51)
Feeder protection
Breaker failure protection (50BF)
End zone fault protection (50DZ)
Pole disagreement protection (62PD)
Overcurrent protection (50/51)
Note!
DPFC is the abbreviation of “Deviation of Power Frequency Component”. When a fault

occurs in the power system, the fault current consists of three parts: the pre-fault power
frequency components, the power frequency variables during the fault and the transient
variables during the fault. DPFC is the power frequency variables during the fault.
2. Auxiliary function
Dynamic busbar replica
CT circuit supervision
VT circuit supervision
Disconnector position alarm
1.3 Feature
1. Protection and Control
Parallel calculation of double DSP system
Independent fault detector element
Accurate measurement which can prevent any undesired trip
Less than 20ms typical trip time for busbar differential protection
High sensitive percentage restraint differential protection
Matching to different CT ratios and settable CT adjustment coefficient
A well proven adaptive weighted anti-saturation algorithm
Friendly human machine interface
Comprehensive event recorder
Multi-language option - English, Chinese and Russian
1-2 PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection

Date: 2011-05-25
1 Introduction
2. Time synchronization
Receiving PPS (pulse per second) and PPM (pulse per minute) via external contact
Receiving PPS, PPM and IRIG-B signal via RS-485
Receiving time synchronization message from substation automation system
3. Event recorder and disturbance recorder
1024 latest fault reports
1024 latest self-supervision reports
1024 latest status change of binary input reports
64 latest fault waveforms (The file format of disturbance recorder is compatible with the
international COMTRADE file)
4. Communication
2 rear RS-485 communication ports supporting with IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, ModBus
protocol or DNP3.0 protocol
4 Ethernet ports at most (depend on the chosen CPU type) supporting with IEC 60870-5-103
protocol or IEC 61850-8-1 protocol
1 rear RS-485 communication port for time synchronization
1 RS-232 communication rear ports for printer
A front multiplex RJ45 port for local communication with a PC
1.4 Abbreviation
Symbol Description
FD Fault detector
BBx Busbar No.x, x is the number of each busbar
BCy Bus coupler No.y, y is the number of each bus coupler
BSz Bus section No.z, z is the number of each bus section
feeder m Feeder No.m, m is the number of each feeder
bay n Bay No.n (includes each BC/BS and each feeder), n is the number of each bay
VCE Voltage controlled element
BBP Busbar differential protection
BFP Breaker failure protection
BFI Breaker failure initiation
EFP End zone fault protection
PD Pole disagreement protection
IDMT Inverse Definite Minimum Time

Date: 2011-05-25
1 Introduction
SAS Substation automatic system

RTU Remote terminal unit
DPFC Deviation of power frequency component
SV Sampled value
1.5 Order Information
This device is flexible to configure according to the application. The following table shows the
required information when ordering a PCS-915.
Ordering Code:
S1 S2 S3 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11
PCS-915 - - - R1.02
Information Required with Order
S1:Application Ordering Code

Single-Busbar, Double-Busbar, Single-Busbar with one bus section A
Double-Busbar with two bus sections B
Double-Busbar with one bus section, Single-Busbar with three bus sections C
One-and-a-half breaker arrangement D
S2:Software Version Ordering Code

(1)
Busbar differential protection (BBP) + bus coupler protection (BCP) 1
(2)
BBP + BCP + feeder protection 2
BBP + BCP+ feeder breaker failure protection (BFP) 3
BBP + BCP + feeder protection + BFP 4
S3:Language Ordering Code

English + Chinese C
English + French F
English + Russian R
English + Spanish S
English + Portuguese P
H1:Power Supply for Device Ordering Code

88~300 Vdc 1
H2:Analog AC Inputs Ordering Code

Not required A
CT 1A (no voltage input) B
CT 5A (no voltage input) C
(3)
CT 1A or/and 5A (no voltage input) D

Date: 2011-05-25
1 Introduction
CT 1A (Unn=100~130V, Phase-to-phase) E
CT 5A (Unn=100~130V, Phase-to-phase) F
(3)
CT 1A or/and 5A (Unn=100~130V, Phase-to-phase) G
H3:IEC 61850-9-2 (SV) / GOOSE Interface Ordering Code

Not required 1
100Base-FX, LC-Connector (8 ports) 2
H4: Number of Terminals Ordering Code

Not required A
1~9 B
9~15 C
15~21 D
(4)
>21 E
H5:Binary Inputs Ordering Code

4 fixed + 14 configurable 1
(5)
4 fixed + (> 176 configurable) 4
H6:Power Supply for Binary Input Ordering Code

88~300 Vdc A
24~60 Vdc B
H7:Binary Outputs Ordering Code

Not required 1
11 signal binary outputs (NO) + 33 binary outputs (NO) 2
11signal binary outputs (NO) + 66 binary outputs (NO) 3
H8:Synchronization Mode Ordering Code

IRIG-B (RS-485 serial port) A
IRIG-B (100Base-FX, ST-Connector) B
IEEE 1588 C
H9:MMS Ports Ordering Code

4 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX, RJ45 1
2 x EIA-485 + 2 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX, RJ45 2
2 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX, RJ45 + 2 x 100Base-FX, ST-Connector 3

Date: 2011-05-25
1 Introduction
H10: Dual-position Binary Inputs (BI) Ordering Code

Not required A
Dual-position BI for disconnector* B
Dual-position BI for circuit breaker (CB)* C
(6)
Dual-position BI for disconnector and CB* D
H11:Protocol Ordering Code

IEC 61850-8-1* (MMS & GOOSE Interlocking) 1
IEC 60870-5-103 (Ethernet, Serial port) 2
DNP 3.0 (Serial port) 3
Note!
For items not specified in the table, please refer to our sales or agent.
The items marked with "*" are not included in the basic price and have an additional cost.
(1)
: Bus coupler protection includes BC end zone fault protection, BC breaker failure protection,
BC pole discrepancy protection, BC overcurrent protection and BC switch-onto-fault protection
(2)
: Feeder protection includes end zone fault protection, pole discrepancy protection and
overcurrent protection.
(3)
: Please declare the concrete number of 1A CT and 5A CT respectively. 1A: ___, 5A: ___
(4)(5)(6)
: Please refer to our sales or agent.

Date: 2011-05-25
2 Technical Data
2 Technical Data
Table of Contents
2 Technical Data................................................................................. 2-a
2.1 Electrical Specifications ................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 Alternating Analog Current................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Alternating Analog Voltage................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.3 Power Supply....................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.4 Binary Input.......................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.5 Binary Output ....................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Mechanical Specifications ............................................................................. 2-2

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range .................................................. 2-3
2.4 Communication Port ....................................................................................... 2-3
2.4.1 EIA-485 Port ........................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.4.2 Ethernet Port........................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port ................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.4.4 Print Port .............................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port ................................................................................................. 2-4
2.5 Type Tests ........................................................................................................ 2-4

2.5.1 Environmental Tests ............................................................................................................ 2-4
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests ................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.5.3 Electrical Tests ..................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility ............................................................................................. 2-5
2.6 Certifications ................................................................................................... 2-6

2.7 Protective Functions....................................................................................... 2-6
2.7.1 Busbar differential protection ............................................................................................... 2-6
2.7.2 Switch-onto-fault protection ................................................................................................. 2-6
2.7.3 Overcurrent protection ......................................................................................................... 2-7

Date: 2011-05-24
2 Technical Data
2.7.4 Pole disagreement protection.............................................................................................. 2-7
2.7.5 Bus coupler breaker failure protection................................................................................. 2-7
2.7.6 Feeder breaker failure protection ........................................................................................ 2-7

Date: 2011-05-24
2 Technical Data
2.1 Electrical Specifications
2.1.1 Alternating Analog Current

Phase rotation ABC
Nominal frequency (fn) 50±5Hz, 60±5Hz
Rated Current (In) 1A 5A
Linear to 0.05In~40In
Thermal withstand
-continuously 4In
-for 10s 30In
-for 1s 100In
-for half a cycle 250In
Burden < 0.15VA/phase @In < 0.25VA/phase @In
Accuracy ±0.5%In
2.1.2 Alternating Analog Voltage

Phase rotation ABC
Nominal frequency (fn) 50±5Hz, 60±5Hz
Rated Voltage (Un) 100V~130V
Linear to 1V~170V
Thermal withstand
-continuously 200V
-10s 260V
-1s 300V
Burden at rated < 0.20VA/phase @Un
Accuracy ±0.5%Un
2.1.3 Power Supply

Standard IEC 60255-11:2008
Rated Voltage 110Vdc/125Vdc, 220Vdc/250Vdc
Operating Range 80%~120% of rated voltage
Permissible AC ripple voltage ≤15% of the nominal auxiliary voltage
Burden
Quiescent condition <25W (4U)
<45W (8U)
Operating condition <35W (4U)
<60W (8U)
2.1.4 Binary Input

Rated Voltage 24V 48V 110V 125V 220V 250V
Rated current drain 1.2mA 2.4mA 1.1mA 1.25mA 2.2mA 2.5mA

Date: 2011-05-24
2 Technical Data
Pickup voltage 55%~70% of rated voltage

Dropoff voltage <55% of rated voltage
Maximum permissible voltage 120% of rated voltage
Withstand voltage
2000Vac, 2800Vdc
-continously
Response time for logic input <1ms
2.1.5 Binary Output

Contact Type Trip output Signal output
Output mode Potential free contact
5A@380Vac 8A@380Vac
Continuous carry
5A@250Vdc 8A@250Vdc
Pickup time <8ms (typical 3ms) <10ms
Dropoff time <5ms <8ms
0.6A@48Vdc 0.7A@48Vdc
Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms) 0.2A@110Vdc 0.3A@110Vdc
0.1A@220Vdc 0.2A@220Vdc
Burden 300mW 240mW
Making capacity 2000VA 3040VA
380Vac
Maximal system voltage
250Vdc
Test voltage across open contact 1000V RMS for 1min 1200V RMS for 1min
6A@3s 10A@3S
Short duration current
15A@0.5s 20A@0.5S
2.2 Mechanical Specifications
Enclosure dimensions (W×H×D) 482.6mm×177mm×291mm(4U),

482.6mm×354.8mm×285mm (8U)
Mounting Way Flush mounted
Trepanning dimensions (W×H) 450mm×179mm(4U), M6 screw
450mm×356.8mm(8U), M6 screw
Housing color Silver grey
Weight per device Approx. 15kg
Housing material Aluminum
Location of terminal Rear panel of the device
Device structure Plug-in modular type @ rear side, integrated frontplate
Protection class
Front side IP40, up to IP51 (Flush mounted)
Other sides IP30
Rear side, connection terminals IP20

Date: 2011-05-24
2 Technical Data
2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range

Operating temperature -40°C to +70°C
Transport and storage temperature
-40°C to +70°C
range
Permissible humidity 5%-95%, without condensation
Pollution degree 2
Altitude <3000m
2.4 Communication Port
2.4.1 EIA-485 Port

Baud rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997
Maximal capacity 32
Transmission distance <500m
Safety level Isolation to ELV level
Twisted pair Screened twisted pair cable
2.4.2 Ethernet Port

Connector type RJ-45
Transmission rate 100Mbits/s
Transmission standard 100Base-TX
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997 or IEC 61850
2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port

2.4.3.1 For Station Level
Characteristic Glass optical fiber

Connector type ST, SC
Fibre type Multi mode
Transmission distance <2km
Wave length 1310nm
Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm
Minimum receiving power Min. -30.0dBm
Margin Min +3.0dB
2.4.3.2 For Process Level

Date: 2011-05-24
2 Technical Data
Connector type LC
Transmission distance <2km
Wave length 1310nm
Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm
Margin Min +3.0dB
2.4.3.3 For Synchronization Port

Connector type ST
Wave length 820nm
Margin Min +3.0dB
2.4.4 Print Port

Type RS-232
Baud Rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
®
Printer type EPSON 300K printer
2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port

Type RS-485
Maximal capacity 32
Timing standard PPS, IRIG-B
2.5 Type Tests
2.5.1 Environmental Tests

Dry cold test IEC60068-2-1:2007
Dry heat test IEC60068-2-2:2007
Damp heat test, cyclic IEC60068-2-30:2005
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests

Vibration IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Class I
Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Class I
2.5.3 Electrical Tests


Date: 2011-05-24
2 Technical Data
Dielectric tests Test voltage 2kV, 50Hz, 1min

Impulse voltage tests Test voltage 5kV
Overvoltage category Ⅲ
Insulation resistance
Isolation resistance >100MΩ@500VDC
measurements
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility

IEC 60255-22-1:2007
1MHz burst disturbance test Common mode: class III 2.5kV
Differential mode: class III 1.0kV
IEC60255-22-2:2008 class IV
Electrostatic discharge test For contact discharge: 8kV
For air discharge: 15kV
IEC 60255-22-3:2007 class III
Frequency sweep
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80~1000MHz
Radio frequency interference tests Spot frequency
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80MHz/160MHz/450MHz/900MHz
Radiated pulse-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=900MHz
IEC 60255-22-4:2008
Fast transient disturbance tests Power supply, I/O, Earth: class IV, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns
Communication terminals: class IV, 2kV, 5kHz, 5/50ns
IEC 60255-22-5:2008
Power supply, AC input, I/O port: class IV, 1.2/50us
Surge immunity test
Common mode: 4kV
Differential mode: 2kV
IEC 60255-22-6:2001
Conducted RF Electromagnetic
Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. Terminal: Class III, 10Vrms, 150
Disturbance
kHz~80MHz
Power Frequency Magnetic Field IEC 61000-4-8:2001
Immunity class V, 100A/m for 1min, 1000A/m for 3s
IEC 61000-4-9:2001
Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity
class V, 6.4/16µs, 1000A/m for 3s
Damped oscillatory magnetic field IEC 61000-4-10:2001
immunity class V, 100kHz & 1MHz–100A/m

Date: 2011-05-24
2 Technical Data
Auxiliary power supply performance IEC60255-11: 2008

- Voltage dips Up to 500ms for dips to 40% of rated voltage without reset
-Voltage short interruptions 100ms for interruption without rebooting
2.6 Certifications
ISO9001:2000
ISO14001:2004
OHSAS18001:1999
ISO10012:2003
CMMI L3
EMC: 2004/108/EC, EN50263:1999
Products safety(PS): 2006/95/EC, EN61010-1:2001
2.7 Protective Functions
Note!
The meanings of symbols mentioned in the following sections are given here.
In -- rated secondary current of CT
Un -- rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT
2.7.1 Busbar differential protection
current setting range 0.05In~20.00In
Tolerance of current setting ≤2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater
Undervoltage setting range 0.05Un ~Un
Residual voltage setting range 0.05Un ~0.2Un
Negative-sequence voltage setting range 0.05Un ~0.2Un
Accuracy of voltage setting ≤2.5% of setting or 0.01Un, whichever is greater
2.7.2 Switch-onto-fault protection
Current setting range 0.05In~20.00In

Date: 2011-05-24
2 Technical Data
2.7.3 Overcurrent protection
Time setting range 0.000~10.000s
Tolerance of time setting ≤1%xSetting + 40ms
2.7.4 Pole disagreement protection
Residual current setting range 0.05In~20.00In
Negative-sequence current setting range 0.05In~20.00In
2.7.5 Bus coupler breaker failure protection
2.7.6 Feeder breaker failure protection
Phase current setting range 0.05In~20.00In
Residual current setting range 0.05In~20.00In
Negative-sequence current setting range 0.05In~20.00In
Undervoltage setting range 0 ~Un
Zero-sequence voltage setting range 0 ~Un
Negative sequence voltage setting range 0 ~Un
Accuracy of voltage setting ≤2.5% of setting or 0.01Un, whichever is greater

Date: 2011-05-24
2 Technical Data

Date: 2011-05-24
3 Operation Theory
3 Operation Theory
Table of Contents
3 Operation Theory ............................................................................ 3-a
3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Function Settings ............................................................................................ 3-4
3.2.1 Function Settings for busbar protection............................................................................... 3-4
3.2.2 Function Settings for each bay ............................................................................................ 3-7
3.3 Busbar Differential Protection ....................................................................... 3-7

3.3.1 Fault detector (FD) element................................................................................................. 3-8
3.3.2 Function Description ............................................................................................................ 3-9
3.3.3 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-16
3.3.4 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-18
3.3.5 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-19
3.4 BC/BS End Zone Fault Protection ............................................................... 3-21

3.4.1 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-21
3.4.2 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-22
3.4.3 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-22
3.5 Feeder End Zone Fault Protection (EFP) .................................................... 3-23

3.5.1 Fault detector element ....................................................................................................... 3-23
3.5.3 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-24
3.5.4 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-24
3.6 BC/BS Switch-onto-fault (SOTF) Protection ............................................... 3-25

3.6.3 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-26
3.6.4 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-26

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
3.6.5 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-27
3.7 Overcurrent (OC) Protection ........................................................................ 3-27

3.7.3 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-29
3.7.4 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-29
3.7.5 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-30
3.8 Pole Discrepancy (PD) Protection ............................................................... 3-32

3.8.3 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-32
3.8.4 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-33
3.8.5 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-33
3.9 BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection (BFP)..................................................... 3-34

3.9.3 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-36
3.9.4 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-37
3.9.5 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-37
3.10 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection (BFP) .................................................. 3-38

3.10.1 Fault detector element ..................................................................................................... 3-38
3.10.2 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-39
3.10.3 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-40
3.10.4 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-42
3.10.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-43
3.11 Position of disconnector and circuit breaker ........................................... 3-46

3.11.2 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-48
3.11.3 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-49
3.12 BC/BS breaker substitution and bypass breaker substitution................ 3-49

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
3.12.2 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-52
3.13 GOOSE and SV function............................................................................. 3-52

3.13.1 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-53
3.13.2 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-54
List of Figures
Figure 3.1-1 Single busbar arrangement .................................................................................. 3-1
Figure 3.1-2 Double busbars arrangement ............................................................................... 3-2
Figure 3.1-3 Single busbar with single BS arrangement ........................................................ 3-2
Figure 3.1-4 Single busbar with two BS arrangement............................................................. 3-3
Figure 3.1-5 Double busbars with two BC and single BS ....................................................... 3-3
Figure 3.1-6 Double busbars with two BC and two BS ........................................................... 3-4
Figure 3.3-1 Sketch diagram of double busbars arrangement............................................... 3-8
Figure 3.3-2 Operation characteristic of steady-state percentage restraint differential

element ................................................................................................................................ 3-10
Figure 3.3-3 Waveform of CT saturation during external fault ............................................. 3-14
Figure 3.3-4 Logic of busbar differential protection.............................................................. 3-17
Figure 3.4-1 Logic of end zone fault protection ..................................................................... 3-22
Figure 3.5-1 Logic of end zone fault protection ..................................................................... 3-24
Figure 3.6-1 Logic of SOTF protection .................................................................................... 3-26
Figure 3.7-1 Logic of overcurrent protection ......................................................................... 3-29
Figure 3.8-1 Logic of pole discrepancy protection ................................................................ 3-33
Figure 3.9-1 The logic scheme of BFI of BS ........................................................................... 3-36
Figure 3.9-2 Logic of BC/BS BFP............................................................................................. 3-36
Figure 3.10-1 Logic of BFP (for the feeder that main transformer is not connected)........ 3-41
Figure 3.10-2 Logic of BFP (for the feeder that main transformer is connected) .............. 3-42
Figure 3.12-1 BC/BS breaker substituting through BB2 ....................................................... 3-50
Figure 3.12-2 BC/BS breaker substituting through BB1 ....................................................... 3-51
PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection 3-c

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
List of Tables
Table 3.2-1 Function settings for busbar .................................................................................. 3-4
Table 3.2-2 Function settings for each bay .............................................................................. 3-7
Table 3.3-1 Input signal ............................................................................................................. 3-18
Table 3.3-2 Output signal .......................................................................................................... 3-18
Table 3.3-3 Busbar protection settings ................................................................................... 3-19
Table 3.3-4 Function link........................................................................................................... 3-20
Table 3.6-3 Switch-onto-fault protection settings .................................................................. 3-27
Table 3.7-3 Overcurrent protection settings........................................................................... 3-30
Table 3.8-3 PD protection settings .......................................................................................... 3-34
Table 3.9-3 BC/BS breaker failure protection settings .......................................................... 3-38
Table 3.10-1 Input signal ........................................................................................................... 3-42
Table 3.10-2 Output signal ........................................................................................................ 3-43
Table 3.10-3 Busbar protection settings ................................................................................. 3-43
3-d PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.10-4 Function link......................................................................................................... 3-46
Table 3.11-1 position status of disconnector or circuit breaker .......................................... 3-47
Table 3.11-4 Function link ......................................................................................................... 3-49
Table 3.13-2 Function link......................................................................................................... 3-54
Table 3.13-3 GOOSE link........................................................................................................... 3-54
PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection 3-e

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
3-f PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
3.1 Overview
PCS-915 provides busbar differential protection (BBP), bus coupler/section protection (includes
overcurrent protection, switch-onto-fault protection, pole disagreement protection, end zone fault
protection and breaker failure protection), feeder protection (includes overcurrent protection, pole
disagreement protection, end zone fault protection and breaker failure protection), CT circuit
supervision and VT circuit supervision.
The device has 2 plug-in modules (protection DSP module and fault detector DSP module) to
perform calculation. The protection DSP module is responsible for calculation of protection
elements, and fault detector DSP module is responsible for calculation of fault detectors. Any fault
detector on fault detector DSP module picks up to provide positive supply of output relays. The
relays will trip only if the fault detector and the corresponding protection element operate
simultaneously. On the premise of 24 samples per cycle, all data measurement, calculation and
logic discrimination can be processed within one sampling period. The event recording and
protection logic calculation are completed simultaneously.
The following figures show the applications of PCS-915 for several typical busbar arrangements.
For specific busbar arrangement, please refer to the project configuration manual for details.
Panel A
PCS-915
* * * * * *
……
VT1
BB1
Figure 3.1-1 Single busbar arrangement

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
Panel A
PCS-915
* * * *
……
VT1
* BB1
VT2
BC1
BB2
Figure 3.1-2 Double busbars arrangement

*
*
*
Figure 3.1-3 Single busbar with single BS arrangement

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.1-4 Single busbar with two BS arrangement
Panel A
PCS-915
* * *
VT1 …… …… VT3
*
BS1
* BB1 BB3 *
VT2
BC1 BC2
BB2
Figure 3.1-5 Double busbars with two BC and single BS

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
*
*
Figure 3.1-6 Double busbars with two BC and two BS
3.2 Function Settings
The device provides function settings to configure the arrangement for busbar protection and
selection of ancillary protection functions. All the function settings is defined in the program and
will be given in specific project configuration manual.
3.2.1 Function Settings for busbar protection
Table 3.2-1 Function settings for busbar
No. Name Range
1 Voltage concerned functions Enable/Disable
2 Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs Enable/Disable

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
No. Name Range
3 Dual-position for disconnector status Enable/Disable
4 Dual-position for breaker status Enable/Disable
5 Breaker failure protection Enable/Disable
6 Breaker failure protection re-tripping function Enable/Disable
7 Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection Enable/Disable
8 Switch-onto-fault protection of bus coupler or bus section Enable/Disable
9 Feeder end zone fault protection Enable/Disable
10 Overcurrent protection of bus coupler or bus section Enable/Disable
11 Feeder overcurrent protection Enable/Disable
12 IDMT overcurrent characteristic Enable/Disable
13 Pole disagreement protection of bus coupler or bus section Enable/Disable
14 Feeder pole disagreement protection Enable/Disable
1) “Voltage concerned functions”
When this setting is set as “Enable”, DPFC voltage FD element, voltage controlled element (VCE)
and VT circuit supervision are put in service. VCE is used for BBP and BFP and are controlled by
respective logic settings [87B.En_VCE] and [Bayn.50BF.Dis_VCE]. If the settings are set as
“Disable”, DPFC voltage FD element and VCE will be disabled and VT circuit supervision will not
function, all settings and information related to voltage will be hidden.
2) “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs”
When this setting is set as “Enable”, function enabling binary input will change into function
disabling binary input. For example, if this setting is set as “Disable”, the controlling binary input of
BBP is [EBI_BBP], BBP can be enabled only when [EBI_BBP] is energized. If this setting is set as
“Enable”, the controlling binary input of BBP is [EBI_Out_BBP], BBP will be disabled when
[EBI_Out_BBP] is energized. The enabling binary inputs of BFP, SOTF, OC and PD are similar to
that of BBP.
3) “Dual-position for disconnector status”
When this setting is set as “Enable”, the device will get both normally closed auxiliary contact and
normally open auxiliary contact of a disconnector to indicate the position of the disconnector.
When this setting is set as “Disable”, the device will only get normally open auxiliary contact of a
disconnector to indicate the position of the disconnector.
4) “Dual-position for breaker status”
When this setting is set as “Enable”, the device will get both normally closed auxiliary contact and
normally open auxiliary contact of a breaker to indicate the position of the breaker. When this
setting is set as “Disable”, the device will only get normally closed auxiliary contact of a breaker to
indicate the position of the breaker.
5) “Breaker failure protection”

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
Breaker Failure protection is put in service when the setting is set as “Enable” and vice versa. All
BFP related settings and information are hidden when the setting is set as “Disable”.
6) “Breaker failure protection re-tripping function”
When this setting is set as “Enable”, breaker failure protection re-tripping function will be enabled,
once BFP operates, it will operate to re-trip concerned breaker after the time delay of
[50BF.t_ReTrp]. If this setting is set as “Disable”, breaker failure protection re-tripping function will
be disabled and the time setting for BFP [50BF.t_ReTrp] will be hidden.
7) “Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection”
The setting is only concerned with main transformer bay (according to the bay configuration, the
function setting “Main-transformer bay” for the bay is set as “Enable”), when this setting is set as
“Enable”, the binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection is
enabled. When the binary input is energized, the voltage controlled element for breaker failure
protection for the bay will be released. If the binary input is energized for over 10s, it will be invalid
and an alarm signal will be issued. When this setting is set as “Disable”, the binary input of
releasing voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection is disabled.
8) “Switch-onto-fault protection of bus coupler or bus section”
Switch-onto-fault (SOTF) protection of BC/BS is put in service when the setting is set as “Enable”
and vice versa. All BC/BS SOTF protection related settings and information are hidden when the
setting is set as “Disable”.
9) “Feeder end zone fault protection”
Feeder end zone fault protection (EFP) is put in service when the setting is set as “Enable” and
vice versa. All EFP related settings and information are hidden when the setting is set as
“Disable”.
10) “overcurrent protection of bus coupler or bus section”, “IDMT overcurrent

characteristic” and “feeder overcurrent protection”
If “Overcurrent protection of bus coupler or bus section” or “feeder overcurrent protection” is set as
“Disable”, BC/BS overcurrent protection or feeder overcurrent protection will be disabled
accordingly and all related settings and information will be hidden.
If “Overcurrent protection of bus coupler or bus section” or “feeder overcurrent protection” is set as
“Enable”, BC/BS overcurrent protection or feeder overcurrent protection is enabled in definite-time
characteristic.
When “IDMT overcurrent characteristic” is set as “Enable”, there will be an option of IDMT
characteristic for both BC/BS overcurrent protection and feeder overcurrent protection. When
“IDMT overcurrent characteristic” is set as “Disable”, all settings related to IDMT characteristic will
be hidden.
11) “Pole disagreement protection of bus coupler or bus section”
PD protection of BC/BS is put in service when the setting is set as “Enable” and vice versa. All
BC/BS PD protection related settings and information are hidden when the setting is set as

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
“Disable”.
12) “Feeder Pole disagreement protection”
Feeder PD protection is put in service when the setting is set as “Enable” and vice versa. All
feeder PD protection related settings and information are hidden when the setting is set as
“Disable”.
3.2.2 Function Settings for each bay
Table 3.2-2 Function settings for each bay
Bay n Range
Type of bay n Feeder/One CT BC(BS)/Two CTs BC(BS)
Enable main-transformer bay Enable/Disable
1) “Type of bay n”
For BC/BS with double CTs available, “Two CTs BC(BS)” is selected. For BC/BS with only one CT
available, “One CT BC(BS)” is selected. For the rest, “Feeder” is selected (includes the bay
connected with main-transformer).
2) “Enable main-transformer bay”
When this setting is set as “Enable” for a bay, the bay will be regarded as connected to a
transformer. For main-transformer bay, there are following addition features:
- Only three-phase breaker failure initiating contact is provided
- the binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection which
can be enabled or disabled by the function setting “Binary input of releasing voltage
controlled element for breaker failure protection”.
3.3 Busbar Differential Protection
The primary protection of PCS-915 is phase-segregated percentage restraint differential

protection. The differential circuits include check zone differential circuit and discriminating zone
differential circuits of each busbar zone. The check zone differential element is used to distinguish
between internal and external fault of the overall busbar system, it measures the current from all
the circuits connected to the busbar system except BC and BS (For the occasion that BS is at the
edge of the protected zone, BS will be taken as an feeder bay, such as BS1 and BS2 in Figure
3.1-6, the BS current will be included in check zone differential element). The discriminating zone
differential elements are used to select faulty zone by measuring the current of all the circuits
connected to individual zones of the busbar system separated by BC and BS.
Figure 3.3-1 shows a primary power system with double busbars arrangement, the two busbars
are defined as busbar No.1 (BB1) and busbar No.2 (BB2) respectively. The polarity mark of feeder
CT is on the busbar side, and the polarity mark of BC CT is on BB1 side.
For usual busbar system arrangement, the polarity mark definition are shown in Figure 3.1-1 to

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.1-6. For special busbar system arrangement, please refer to the project configuration
manual for details.
Figure 3.3-1 Sketch diagram of double busbars arrangement
Note!
The protective device only identifies the physical position of busbar, ignoring the number of
busbar, takes the busbar arrangement in Figure 3.3-1 as an example, if only one CT is
available at BC1, the protective device will refer the busbar of which the polarity of BC1 CT
is towards as BB1.
Discriminative zone No.1 is defined as discriminative differential element of BB1. Discriminative

zone No.2 is defined as discriminative differential element of BB2.
3.3.1 Fault detector (FD) element
PCS-915 provides three independent FD elements for busbar differential protection, which are
DPFC voltage FD element, DPFC current FD element and differential current FD element. If any of
these three elements picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait
for the tripping signal from busbar differential protection. The fault detector output signal will last
for 500ms after the corresponding fault detector element drop off.
1. DPFC voltage FD element
When DPFC voltage of any phase of any busbar is larger than the threshold, DPFC voltage FD
element picks up, the operating criterion is:
∆u>∆UFloat+0.05Un (Equation 3.3-1)

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
Where:
∆u: Instantaneous value of phase-to-phase DPFC voltage
∆UFloat: Float threshold value, automatically varied with the gradually voltage changing
0.05Un: Fixed threshold value, Un is the rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage.
If the function setting “Voltage concerned functions” is set as “Disable” or VT circuit failure is
detected, DPFC voltage FD element will quit automatically.
2. DPFC current FD element
If DPFC check zone restraint current is larger than the threshold, DPFC current fault detector
element will operate, the operating criterion is:
∆si>∆SIFloat+0.5In (Equation 3.3-2)
Where:
∆si: Instantaneous value of DPFC check zone restraint current of any phase (scalar sum of current
change of all circuits/bays for check zone)
∆SIFloat: Float threshold value, automatically varied with the gradually current changing
0.5In: Fixed threshold value, In is the rated secondary current of reference CT.
3. Differential current FD element
When any phase of the check zone differential current is larger than the setting, this element will
operate. The operating criterion is:
ID> [87B.I_Bias] (Equation 3.3-3)
Where:
ID: Differential phase current of check zone
[87B.I_Bias]: Current setting of busbar differential protection
3.3.2 Function Description
3.3.2.1 Percentage restraint differential element
The percentage restraint differential element includes steady-state percentage restraint differential
element and DPFC percentage restraint differential element.
Steady-state percentage restraint differential element
m
The differential current: ID = ∑I
j=1
j

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
m
The restraint current: IR = ∑I
j=1
j
The operating criterion is:
I D > [87B.I _ Bias]

 (Equation 3.3-4)
 I D > KI R
Where:
K: Restraint coefficient of steady-state differential element
Ij: The current of the j-th feeder (Feeder j) connected
[87B.I_Bias]: Current setting of busbar differential protection
The operation characteristic is shown as Figure 3.3-2.
ID
ID=IR Operation region
ID=kIR
[87B.I_Bias]
IR
Figure 3.3-2 Operation characteristic of steady-state percentage restraint differential element
To enhance the sensitivity of steady-state check zone differential element for a fault occurred in
the weak source bus zone when the BC breaker is open, dual restraint coefficients [0.5, 0.3] and
[0.6, 0.5] are adopted for steady-state check zone and discriminative zones respectively.
When one of the following conditions is fulfilled, the busbar steady-state percentage restraint
differential protection will operate.
1. Steady-state check zone differential element with high restraint coefficient (0.5) operates and
steady-state discriminative zone differential element with low restraint coefficient (0.5)
operates.

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
2. Steady-state check zone differential element with low restraint coefficient (0.3) operates and
steady-state discriminative zone differential element with high restraint coefficient (0.6)
operates.
DPFC percentage restraint differential element
The DPFC percentage restraint differential element is adopted to enhance the performance of
busbar protection against high impedance fault and the influence of heavy loading condition. The
busbar DPFC differential protection is formed by DPFC percentage restraint differential element
and steady-state check zone percentage restraint differential element with fixed restraint
coefficient 0.2.
m
The DPFC differential current: ∆ID = ∑ ∆I
j=1
j
m
The DPFC restraint current: ∆IR = ∑ ∆I
j=1
j
The operating criterion is:
∆I D > ∆I DFloat + I DPickup


I D > 0.2I R (Equation 3.3-5)
 ∆I D > K / ∆I R

Where:
K': DPFC restraint coefficient
∆Ij: DPFC current of the j-th feeder (Feeder j) connected
∆IDFloat: Float threshold value of DPFC check zone differential current
IDPickup: Fixed threshold value of DPFC check zone differential current, which derives from the
setting of [87B.I_Bias]
Similar to steady-state percentage restraint differential element, dual restraint coefficients are also
introduced to DPFC differential element. The restraint coefficients are fixed at [0.7, 0.3] and [0.7,
0.5] for DPFC check zone and discriminating zones respectively.
When the steady-state check zone percentage restraint differential element with fixed restraint
coefficient of 0.2 operates, if one of the following conditions is fulfilled, the busbar DPFC
percentage restraint differential protection will operate.
1. DPFC check zone percentage restraint differential element with high restraint coefficient (0.7)
operates and DPFC discriminating zone percentage restraint differential element with low
restraint coefficient (0.5) operates.
2. DPFC check zone percentage restraint differential element with low restraint coefficient (0.3)

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
operates and DPFC discriminating zone percentage restraint differential element with high
restraint coefficient (0.7) operates.
3.3.2.2 Voltage controlled element of busbar differential protection (VCE_BBP)
Voltage controlled element is used as an auxiliary condition.
The operating criteria are:
UP ≤ [87B.U_VCE] (Equation 3.3-6)
3U0 ≥ [87B.3U0_VCE] (Equation 3.3-7)
U2 ≥ [87B.U2_VCE] (Equation 3.3-8)
Where:
UP: Phase voltage
3U0: Residual voltage (from calculated internally)
U2: Negative sequence voltage
If the logic setting [87B.En_VCE] is set as “1”, busbar differential protection is always blocked by
voltage controlled element. It only operates to trip the faulty busbar zone if the voltage of
corresponding busbar zone meets any of the above operating criteria.
If the function setting “Voltage concerned functions” is set as “Disable” or the logic setting
[87B.En_VCE] is set as “0”, the device will consider that VCE_BBP of all busbars operate.
3.3.2.3 Faulty busbar zone discrimination
The check zone differential element calculates the current from all circuits connected to the entire
busbar system except BC and BS to distinguish between internal and external fault. The
discriminating zone differential elements calculate the current of all the circuits connected to
individual zones via replica image of disconnector position to determine faulty zone.
When the operation criterion of check zone differential element (steady-state check zone
differential element is supervised by CT saturation detector 2 and DPFC check zone differential
element is supervised by CT saturation detector 1, to be described in the following section) and
any discriminating zone differential element is fulfilled, VCE_BBP of any connected busbar
operates, the busbar differential protection will operate to trip all bays connected to the faulty
busbar.
The protection has a feature of “inter-connection operation mode”, the feature will be effective
automatically under the following conditions.
1. A binary input [EBI_IntLink_Modex] (x=1, 2, 3) is energized, it should be energized when two

bus zones are coupled together and unable to detach for a particular system operation
condition.

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
2. On-load transfer condition (when two busbar disconnectors of one feeder are closed at the
same time).
Under the inter-connection operation mode, the discriminating zone differential elements measure
the current signals are the same as that of check zone differential element. The coupled busbars
will be tripped simultaneously when there is a fault.
For other busbar system arrangement, please refer to the specific project configuration manual for
detail inter-connection operation mode supplementary logic.
3.3.2.4 Backup busbar differential elements
If only the check zone percentage restraint differential element (supervised by CT saturation
detector 2) operates, two stages of backup protection with fixed time delay are applied to trip the
corresponding circuit breakers (controlled by the logic setting [87B.En_Dly_Bias]). Stage 1 of
backup protection will trip BC/BS (when VCE_BBP of any busbar connected with the BC/BS
operates or VCE_BBP is disabled) and the feeders of which CT correction coefficient is not zero
and does not have disconnector position after 240ms. Stage 2 of backup protection will trip the
feeders connected to the busbar of which voltage clocking has been released and the feeders with
current larger than 2*In (In: the rated secondary current of reference CT of reference CT) after
480ms.
3.3.2.5 Detection of CT saturation
Two detectors are used to prevent unwanted tripping caused by severe CT saturation during
external close up fault. If the differential current is determined to be caused by CT saturation, the
device will block busbar differential protection to prevent mal-operation.
CT saturation detector 1
When DPFC voltage or current FD element operates, the adaptive weighted algorithm for CT
saturation detector will be activated. In case of busbar fault occurs, DPFC differential element will
operate almost at the same time with DPFC voltage FD element or DPFC current FD element,
whereas for external fault, DPFC differential element will not operate before CT saturation at the
fault incipient stage, it will only operate after DPFC voltage element and DPFC current element in
case CT is saturated. Adaptive weighted algorithm for CT saturation detector is derived from the
difference of operating time among these DPFC elements. In coordination with DPFC differential
element, it has performed excellently to distinguish between internal and external fault with CT
saturation.
CT saturation detector 2
Harmonic restraint element is used in CT saturation detector 2 by analyzing the waveforms of

differential current harmonics. The detector enables the busbar differential element to remain
stable for an external fault with CT saturation while to maintain fast tripping for the external fault
evolved to internal fault on the same phase.
The blocking signal of CT saturation detector 2 will only last for 500ms. After that the busbar
differential element is released to operate for complicated fault conditions and minimized affected
area. In practical cases, CT transient saturation will not be more than 500ms.

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.3-3 Waveform of CT saturation during external fault
Figure 3.3-3 shows the current waveforms recorded in dynamic simulation with heavy CT
saturation during external phase-to-phase fault. Protection stability is well achieved in this extreme
case.
Note!
settings.
In Section 3.3, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar. For a
bus coupler bay, “@BCy” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus coupler.
For a bus section bay, “@BSz” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus
section.
3.3.2.6 CT Circuit Supervision
CT circuit failure
1. If the check zone differential current is larger than the setting [I_AlmH_CTS], an alarm
[AlmH_CTS] will be issued and BBP will be blocked with a time delay of 5s. The alarm can be
reset only by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] after the CT circuit returns to
normal condition.
2. For the BC that only one CT is available , if the check zone differential current is smaller than
the setting [I_AlmH_CTS] and both discriminating zone differential currents of the two
connected busbars are larger than [I_AlmH_CTS], BC CT circuit failure alarm signal
[@BCy.AlmH_CTS] will be issued with a time delay of 5s and BBP will not be blocked, but the
inter-connected operation mode will be enabled automatically. Under this situation, if any
internal fault occurs on any of the two busbars, the device will not identify the faulty busbar.

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
The alarm can be reset only by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] after the CT
circuit returns to normal condition.
3. For the BC that double CTs are available, if the check zone differential current is smaller than
the setting [I_AlmH_CTS] and discriminating zone differential current of any connected
busbar is larger than [I_AlmH_CTS], if the discriminating zone differential current equals to
the difference of current between the two CTs, BC CT circuit failure alarm signal
[@BCy.AlmH_CTS] will be issued with a time delay of 5s and BBP will not be blocked.
When the function setting “Voltage concerned functions” is set as “Enable” and VT circuit failure is
not detected, CT circuit supervision will cease if VCE of any busbar operates. If the function setting
“Voltage concerned functions” is set as “Disable”, CT circuit supervision will not be affected by
voltage.
CT circuit abnormality
1. If the check zone differential current is larger than the setting i.e. [I_AlmL_CTS], an alarm
[AlmL_CTS] will be issued with a time delay of 5s. The alarm can be reset only by energizing
the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] after the CT circuit returns to normal condition.
2. For the BC that only one CT is available , if the check zone differential current is smaller than
the setting [I_AlmL_CTS] and both discriminating zone currents of the two connected busbars
are larger than [I_AlmL_CTS], BC CT circuit abnormality alarm signal [@BCy.AlmL_CTS] will
be issued with a time delay of 5s. The alarm can be reset only by energizing the resetting
binary input [BI_RstTarg] after the CT circuit returns to normal condition.
3. For the BC that double CTs are available, if the check zone differential current is smaller than
the setting [I_AlmL_CTS] and discriminating zone differential current of any connected busbar
is larger than [I_AlmL_CTS], if the discriminating zone differential current equals to the
difference of current between the two CTs, BC CT circuit abnormality alarm signal
[@BCy.AlmL_CTS] will be issued with a time delay of 3s.
4. BBP will not be blocked when CT circuit is abnormal.
Discriminating zone CT circuit failure (when double CTs are available for BC)
1. If discriminating zone differential current of BBx is larger than [I_AlmL_CTS], BBx CT circuit
abnormality alarm signal [@BBx.AlmL_CTS] will be issued with a time delay of 3s.
2. If discriminating zone differential current of BBx is larger than [I_AlmH_CTS], BBx CT circuit
failure alarm signal [@BBx.AlmH_CTS] will be issued with a time delay of 5s and
discriminating zone differential circuit of BBx will be blocked.
3.3.2.7 VT Circuit Supervision
1. If 3 times negative sequence voltage (3U2) of BBx is larger than 0.2Un (Un: secondary rated
phase-to-ground voltage of VT), an alarm [@BBx.Alm_VTS] will be issued with a time delay of
1.25s.
2. If BBx is inservice and the scalar sum of three phase-voltage (|UA|+|UB|+|UC|) of BBx is
smaller than Un, an alarm [@BBx.Alm_VTS] will be issued with a time delay of 1.25s.

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
If VT circuit failure is detected, DPFC voltage FD element will be disabled. When the three
phase-voltage returns to normal condition, the alarm [@BBx.Alm_VTS] will be reset automatically
with a time delay of 10s.
If the fault detector element picks up due to a disturbance in the system (DPFC current is
detected), the VT circuit supervision will be disabled for 3s.
When VCE (of BBP or BFP) of BBx operates for over 3s, an alarm [@BBx.Alm_VCE] will be
issued.
3.3.2.8 External Block Signal
PCS-915 provides a binary input [BI_Blk_BBP] to block BBP through external binary signal. BBP
will be blocked if the binary input [BI_Blk_BBP] is energized. However, if the binary input
[BI_Blk_BBP] is energized for over 1 second, PCS-915 will issue an alarm [87B.Alm_BI_Blk] and
the blocking for BBP is released.
3.3.3 Logic
BB1 logic is shown as follows as an example, logic of other bus zone(s) is(are) similar.

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
CT saturation
detector 1
Figure 3.3-4 Logic of busbar differential protection
Where:
DPFC current FD element: please refer to Section 3.3.1.
DPFC voltage FD element: please refer to Section 3.3.1.
DPFC DIF: DPFC percentage restraint differential element for check zone
DPFC DIF1: DPFC percentage restraint differential element for bus zone No.1
SP DIF: Steady-state percentage restraint differential element for check zone
SP DIF 1: Steady-state percentage restraint differential element for bus zone No.1
SP DIF x: Steady-state percentage restraint differential element for any bus zone
HM REL: Harmonic release element for check zone

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
HM REL1: Harmonic release element for bus zone No.1
VCE_BBP 1: Voltage controlled element of BBP of BB1
VCE_BBP x: Voltage controlled element of BBP of any busbar
VCE_BBP x & BBx is in service: VCE_BBP of any energized busbar operates
Diff_BB1: Differential element of BB1 (not controlled by VEC_BBP) operates
Different from BC, busbar differential protection operating to trip BS is not controlled by VEC_BBP
3.3.4 I/O Signal
Table 3.3-1 Input signal
No. Signal Description
Binary input of enabling BBP (it is configured when the function setting
1 EBI_BBP “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is set as “Disable”), if it is not
configured, its default value is “1”
Binary input of disabling BBP (it is configured when the function setting
2 EBI_Out_BBP “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is set as “Enable”), if it is not
Binary input indicating that two busbars are under the inter-connected
3 EBI_IntLink_Modex
operation mode, if it is not configured, its default value is “0”
4 BI_Blk_BBP External binary input of blocking BBP
Table 3.3-2 Output signal
1 87B.Op_Dly1 Stage 1 of backup protection operates
3 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_Bias Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
4 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
5 87B.Op_Trp@BCy Busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy
6 87B.Op_Trp@BSz Busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz
7 87B.Alm_BI_Blk External binary input of blocking BBP is energized for over 1s
Alarm signal indicating that differential current FD element picks up for

8 87B.Alm_Pkp_Bias
over 10s
Alarm signal indicating that DPFC voltage FD element or DPFC current

9 87B.Alm_Pkp_DPFC
FD element picks up for over 10s
10 AlmH_CTS CT circuit failure
11 @BCy.AlmH_CTS BCy CT circuit failure
12 AlmL_CTS CT circuit abnormality
13 @BCy.AlmL_CTS BCy CT circuit abnormality

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
14 @BBx.AlmH_CTS BBx CT circuit failure alarm
15 @BBx.AlmL_CTS BBx CT circuit abnormality alarm
16 @BBx.Alm_VTS BBx VT circuit failure
17 @BBx.Alm_VCE VCE (of BBP or BFP) of BBx picks up for over 3s
Alarm signal indicating BBP is disabled. If the logic setting

[87B.En_Alm_Off] is set as “1”, once BBP is disabled (BBP can be
18 87B.Alm_Off disabled by the corresponding enabling binary input, function link or
enabling logic setting), the alarm signal indicating BBP is disabled will
be issued
3.3.5 Settings
Busbar Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsBBP Settings
Table 3.3-3 Busbar protection settings
No. Name Range Step Remark
1 87B.I_Bias 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Pickup value of differential current
2 I_AlmL_CTS 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Current setting of CT circuit abnormality
3 I_AlmH_CTS 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Current setting of CT circuit failure
4 87B.U_VCE 0.05Un~Un 0.01V Under voltage setting of VCE for BBP
5 87B.3U0_VCE 0.05Un~0.2Un 0.01V Residual voltage setting of VCE for BBP
Negative-sequence voltage setting of VCE

6 87B.U2_VCE 0.05Un~0.2Un 0.01V
for BBP
1: Enabling busbar differential protection

7 87B.En 0,1 1
0: Disabling busbar differential protection
1: BBP is controlled by VCE

8 87B.En_VCE 0,1 1
0: BBP will not be controlled by VCE
1: Alarm signal will be issued if BBP is

disabled
9 87B.En_Alm_Off 0,1 1
0: Alarm signal will not be issued if BBP is
disabled
1: two stages of backup busbar differential

protection is enabled
10 87B.En_Dly_Bias 0,1 1
0: two stages of backup busbar differential
protection is disabled
1: If any disconnector position alarm is

issued, once the abnormality of
11 En_AutoRecov_DS 0,1 1 disconnector position disappears, the
alarm will be reset automatically.
0: If any disconnector position alarm is

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
issued, the alarm can not be reset unless

energizing the disconnector position
confirm binary input [BI_ConfirmDS]
Un: Rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT.
1. [87B.I_Bias]
It should ensure busbar differential protection sensitive enough under minimum fault level
condition and should be larger than maximum load current of its outlets (in order to prevent BBP
from mal-operation when CT secondary circuit fails).
2. [I_AlmL_CTS]
This setting is applied to better identifying the abnormality of CT circuit of light load feeder and
shunt of CT circuit, etc. It should be smaller than [I_AlmH_CTS] and can be set as
0.75*[I_AlmH_CTS].
3. [I_AlmH_CTS]
It should be larger than unbalance current in normal operation mode. The recommended value is
0.06In~0.1In.
4. [87B.U_VCE]
It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is a symmetric fault occurring in the busbar zone.
The recommended value is 0.7Un.
5. [87B.3U0_VCE]
It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is an unsymmetrical fault occurring in the busbar
zone and it should be larger than maximum residual voltage in normal operation mode.
6. [87B.U2_VCE]
It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is an unsymmetrical fault occurring in the busbar
zone and it should be larger than the maximum negative sequence voltage in normal operation
mode.
Function Link
Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links
Table 3.3-4 Function link
No. Symbol Remark

1 Link_87B
1: Two busbars are under inter-connected operation mode

2 Link_IntLink_Modex
0: Two busbars are not under inter-connected operation mode
For BBP, the relation is “AND” among the function link [Link_87B], the corresponding enabling

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
binary input [EBI_BBP] and the corresponding logic setting [87B.En].
For [Link_IntLink_Modex], the relation is “OR” among the function link and the corresponding
enabling binary input [EBI_IntLink_Modex].
3.4 BC/BS End Zone Fault Protection
For BC/BS with double CTs available, such as BC/BS in Figure 3.1-6, BC/BS end zone fault
protection will not act on for dead zone is not exist.
For BC/BS with only one CT available, there will be a blind spot for a fault occurs between BC/BS
breaker and BC/BS CT, the fault can not be cleared after busbar on the breaker side is tripped. In
order to clear the fault quickly, BC/BS end zone fault protection is provided.
After busbar differential protection sends the command to trip BC/BS, if the BC/BS breaker has
been tripped but the BC/BS current is still detected, then after 150ms the BC/BS end zone fault
protection will operate to issue a signal and the BC/BS current will be excluded from discriminating
zone percentage restraint differential elements of the two connected busbars.
If the two connected busbars are in service and BC/BS breaker is open, in order to prevent both
busbars from tripping for an end zone fault, the BC/BS current will be excluded from discriminating
zone percentage restraint differential element of the connected two busbars.
Note!
settings.
In Section 3.4, for a bus coupler bay, “@BCy” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bus coupler, for a bus section bay, “@BSz” is used to refer to the label
setting of corresponding bus section.

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
3.4.2 Logic
The logic of BC/BS end zone fault protection is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.1-2 as an
example).
Figure 3.4-1 Logic of end zone fault protection
BBx is in service: If busbar phase voltage of BBx is greater than 0.3Un or current of any connected
bay is larger than 0.04In, BBx is thought as in service.
Breaker of BC1 is open: please refer to Section 3.11.1.
DIF_CZ: Check zone percentage restraint differential element with low restraint coefficient
3.4.3 I/O Signal
1 50DZ.Op_@BCy End zone fault protection of BCy operates
2 50DZ.Op_@BSz End zone fault protection of BSz operates

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
3.5 Feeder End Zone Fault Protection (EFP)
3.5.1 Fault detector element
Feeder end zone fault protection is provided for each feeder bay. PCS-915 provides independent
FD element for feeder EFP ([FD_EFP_Fdr]), as shown in Figure 3.5-1, if any phase current of
feeder bay n is larger than 0.2In and current of feeder bay n is excluded from differential current,
FD element for feeder EFP picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and
wait for the tripping signal from feeder EFP. The fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after
the fault detector element drop off.
Note!
sampled values related with each bay will change with the corresponding label settings.
In Section 3.5, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding feeder bay.
If a fault occurs between breaker and busbar CT of a feeder bay, the fault can not be cleared even
the breaker is tripped. In order to clear the fault quickly, end zone fault protection for each feeder
bay is provided.
If the breaker of a feeder is open, and three phase currents of the feeder are all smaller than 0.04In,
then the feeder current will be excluded from differential elements which prevent BBP from
mal-operation for the fault in the dead zone. For a fault occurred between circuit breaker and CT,
FD element of feeder EFP picks up for over 20ms, end zone fault protection will operates and
initiates transfer trip to trip remote circuit breaker.
In order to prevent BBP from mal-operation when closing onto the fault, when breaker of a feeder
is open, the feeder current is included in differential circuit instantaneously if the closing binary
input of the feeder [BI_Cls_@Bayn] changes from “0” to “1”. However, if the binary input
[BI_Cls_@Bayn] is energized for over 1 second, an alarm [@Bayn.Alm_Cls] will be issued.

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
Busbar
Feeder Breaker
Dead zone
Feeder CT
3.5.3 Logic
The logic of end zone fault protection is shown as Figure 3.5-1.
SIG Ia_Bay <0.04In

≥1
SIG Ib_Bay <0.04In &
SIG Ic_Bay <0.04In
SIG [@Bay Alm_52b]

0 1s & Bay current is not included in differential current
BI [BI_Cls_@Bay ]
SIG Breaker of bay is open

FD_EFP_Fdr
SIG Ia_Bay >0.2In 20ms 0
& [50DZ.OP_@Bay ]
SIG Ib_Bay >0.2In ≥1
[Op_TT_@Bay ]
SIG Ic_Bay >0.2In
Figure 3.5-1 Logic of end zone fault protection
3.5.4 I/O Signal
Normally closed auxiliary contact of bay n breaker is energized but

1 @Bayn.Alm_52b
current can still be detected in bay n
2 BI_Cls_@Bayn Binary input of closing circuit breaker of bay n
1 50DZ.Op_@Bayn EFP of bay n operates

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
EFP or BFP of bay n operates to initiate transfer trip to remote circuit

2 Op_TT_@Bayn
breaker
3 @Bayn.Alm_Cls Closing binary input [BI_Cls_@Bayn] is energized for over 1s
3.6 BC/BS Switch-onto-fault (SOTF) Protection
PCS-915 provides independent FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection, if any phase current of
BC/BS is larger than the current setting [50SOTF.I_Set], FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection
picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait for the tripping signal
from BC/BS SOTF protection. The fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after the fault
detector element drop off.
If a busbar is first energized via a BC or BS after maintenance or newly installed, a feature of

BC/BS SOTF is incorporated in the PCS-915 to trip the BC/BS immediately when it is closed on to
a fault.
SOTF protection is enabled if the following conditions are met.
1. The BC/BS CB status is in open position
2. BC/BS three phase-currents are smaller than 0.04In.
3. Any of the two connected busbars is out of service.
If any of the following conditions is met, SOTF protection will be disabled after 300ms
1. The position status of BC/BS breaker changes from open to closed.
2. BC current changes from being smaller than 0.04In to being larger than 0.04In.
3. Both connected busbars are in service.
If FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection picks up in the duration when SOTF protection is
enabled, BC/BS SOTF protection will operate to trip BC/BS breaker without controlled by VCE.
Note!
settings.
In Section 3.6, for a bus coupler bay, “@BCy” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bus coupler, for a bus section bay, “@BSz” is used to refer to the label
setting of corresponding bus section.

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
3.6.3 Logic
The logic of BC/BS SOTF protection is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.1-2 as an
example).
Figure 3.6-1 Logic of SOTF protection
BBx is in service: If busbar phase voltage of BBx is greater than 0.3Un or current of any connected
bay is larger than 0.04In, BBx is thought as in service.
3.6.4 I/O Signal
Binary input of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured when

1 EBI_SOTF_BC the function setting “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is set as
“Disable”), if it is not configured, its default value is “1”
Binary input of disabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured when

2 EBI_Out_SOTF_BC the function setting “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is set as
“Enable”), if it is not configured, its default value is “0”
1 50SOTF.Op_Trp@BCy SOTF protection of BCy operates
2 50SOTF.Op_Trp@BSz SOTF protection of BSz operates
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for SOTF protection of BCy

3 @BCy.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp
picks up for over 10s
4 @BSz.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp Alarm signal indicating that FD element for SOTF protection of BSz

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
3.6.5 Settings
Switch-onto-fault Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsSOTF Settings
Table 3.6-3 Switch-onto-fault protection settings
1 50SOTF.I_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Current setting for BC/BS SOTF protection
1: Enabling BC/BS SOTF protection

2 50SOTF.En 0,1 1
0: Disabling BC/BS SOTF protection
Function Link
No. Symbol Remark
1: Enabling SOTF protection of BCy

1 @BCy.Link_50SOTF
0: Disabling SOTF protection of BCy
1: Enabling SOTF protection of BSz

2 @BSz.Link_50SOTF
0: Disabling SOTF protection of BSz
For BC/BS SOTF protection, the relation is “AND” among the function link [@BCy.Link_50SOTF]
(or [@BSz.Link_50SOTF]), the corresponding enabling binary input [EBI_SOTF_BC] and the
corresponding logic setting [50SOTF.En].
3.7 Overcurrent (OC) Protection
PCS-915 provides two independent FD elements for OC protection of each bay (includes BC/BS
and each feeder), which are phase overcurrent FD element and ground overcurrent FD element. If
any of the two elements picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait
for the tripping signal from OC protection element. The fault detector output signal will last for
500ms after the corresponding fault detector element drop off.
Phase overcurrent FD element
When any phase current of bay n is larger than the threshold, phase overcurrent FD element picks
up, the operating criterion is:
Max(Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn) > [Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]
Ground overcurrent FD element

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
When residual current of bay n is larger than the threshold, ground overcurrent FD element picks
up, the operating criterion is:
3I0_Bayn > [Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set]
Note!
In Section 3.7, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay.
Overcurrent protection includes phase overcurrent element and ground overcurrent element, each
overcurrent element can be configured as inverse-time overcurrent protection or definite-time
overcurrent protection by the setting [Bayn.50/51.Opt_Curve] (0: definite-time characteristic, 1:
normal inverse-time characteristic, 2: very inverse-time characteristic, 3: extremely inverse-time
characteristic, 4: long-time inverse-time characteristic, 5: user-defined inverse-time characteristic).
For overcurrent protection, the inverse-time characteristic complies with the following formula
(based on IEC60255-3 standard).
Kt
t (I ) = TMS
I
( )τ − 1
Ib
Where:
Ib is current setting, For ground overcurrent protection, it is the setting
[Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set]. For phase overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.I_Set].
K t is time constant, when inverse-time characteristic is chosen as “user-defined inverse-time
characteristic”, user has to input the setting [Bayn.50/51.K] according to the application.
TMS is time multiplier, i.e. the setting [Bayn.50/51.TMS].

τ is exponent, when inverse-time characteristic is chosen as “user-defined inverse-time
characteristic”, user has to input the setting [Bayn.50/51.Alpha] according to the application.
I for ground overcurrent protection, it is actual value of calculated residual current of bay n. For
phase overcurrent protection, it is actual value of measured maximum phase current of bay n.
t (I ) is calculated operating time of inverse-time overcurrent protection
For phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent protection, definite-time, four IEC
inverse-time characteristics and one user-defined inverse-time characteristic are available for

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
selection. It can be shown in the following table.
Bayn.50/51.Opt_Curve Kt τ
0: definite-time characteristic - -
1: normal inverse-time characteristic 0.14 0.02
2: very inverse-time characteristic 13.5 1
3: extremely inverse-time characteristic 80 2
4: long-time inverse-time characteristic 120 1
5: user-defined inverse-time characteristic Bayn.50/51.K Bayn.50/51.Alpha
3.7.3 Logic
The logic of overcurrent protection is shown as bellow.
SET [Opt_Curve_OC_Bayn]=0
[Bayn.50/51.t_Op]
&
SET Ia_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]
[Bayn.50/51.t_Op]
& ≥1
SET Ib_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]
[Bayn.50/51.t_Op]
&
SET Ic_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]
≥1 50/51P.Op_Trp@Bayn
& t(Ia_Bayn)
&
[Bayn.50/51.tmin]
& t(Ib_Bayn)
& ≥1
[Bayn.50/51.tmin]
& t(Ic_Bayn)
&
[Bayn.50/51.tmin]
EN [50/51.En]
EN [@Bayn.Link_50/51] & & [Bayn.50/51.t_Op]
BI [EBI_OC]
≥1 50/51G.Op_Trp@Bayn
SET 3I0_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set]
& t(3I0_Bayn)
&
[Bayn.50/51.tmin]
Figure 3.7-1 Logic of overcurrent protection
3.7.4 I/O Signal

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
Binary input of enabling overcurrent protection (it is configured when the

1 EBI_OC function setting “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is set as
Binary input of disabling overcurrent protection (it is configured when the

2 EBI_Out_OC function setting “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is set as
1 50/51P.Op_Trp@Bayn phase overcurrent protection of bay n operates
2 50/51G.Op_Trp@Bayn ground overcurrent protection of bay n operates
Alarm signal indicating that phase overcurrent FD element of bay n

3 @Bayn.51P.Alm_Pkp
Alarm signal indicating that ground overcurrent FD element of bay n

4 @Bayn.51G.Alm_Pkp
3.7.5 Settings
Overcurrent Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsOC Settings
Table 3.7-3 Overcurrent protection settings
Operating characteristic selection for

1 Bayn.50/51.Opt_Curve 0~5 1
overcurrent protection of bay n
Current setting for phase overcurrent

2 Bayn.50/51P.I_Set 0.04In~20.00In 0.01A
protection of bay n
Current setting for ground overcurrent

3 Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set 0.04In~20.00In 0.01A
protection of bay n
Definite time delay setting for overcurrent

4 Bayn.50/51.t_Op 0.000~10.000s 0.001s
protection of bay n
Minimum time delay for inverse-time

5 Bayn.50/51.tmin 0.000~10.000s 0.001s
Time constant for inverse-time

6 Bayn.50/51.K 0.01~200 0.01
Time multiplier for inverse-time

7 Bayn.50/51.TMS 0.000~10.000 0.001
Exponent for inverse-time overcurrent

8 Bayn.50/51.Alpha 0.01~10 0.01
protection of bay n
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection

9 50/51.En 0,1 1
and ground overcurrent protection for all

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
bays
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection
and ground overcurrent protection for all
bays
1: Enabling overcurrent protection

operates to initiate BFP
10 50/51.En_Init50BF 0,1 1
0: Disabling overcurrent protection
In: Rated secondary current of reference CT
1. [Bayn.50/51.Opt_Curve]
The parameters of each characteristic are listed in the following table.
Bayn.50/51.Opt_Curve Kt τ
0: definite-time - -
1: normal inverse-time characteristic 0.14 0.02
2: very inverse-time characteristic 13.5 1
3: extremely inverse-time characteristic 80 2
4: long-time inverse-time characteristic 120 1
5: user-defined inverse-time characteristic Bayn.50/51.K Bayn.50/51.Alpha
2. [Bayn.50/51.tmin]
This is the minimum delay of inverse-time OC protection.

Recommended value: 0.1s.
3. [Bayn.50/51.TMS]
This is the time multiplier setting ( TMS ) of inverse-time OC protection.

If inverse-time OC protection coordinates with a line, the setting should be graded with the
inverse-time OC protection of the line.
If inverse-time OC protection is used independently, it can be set according to the actual
requirement.
4. [Bayn.50/51.K], [Bayn.50/51.Alpha]
[Bayn.50/51.K] and [Bayn.50/51.Alpha] are respectively the time constant ( K t ) and the exponent
( τ ) of inverse-time OC protection, which are set according to the model of inverse-time OC

protection. They are valid only when the setting [Bayn.50/51.Opt_Curve] is set as “5” (i.e.
user-defined inverse-time characteristic is selected).
Function Link

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
No. Symbol Remark
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent

protection of bay n
1 @Bayn.Link_50/51
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent
protection of bay n
For overcurrent protection, the relation is “AND” among the function link [@Bayn.Link_50/51], the
corresponding enabling binary input [EBI_OC] and the corresponding logic setting [50/51.En].
3.8 Pole Discrepancy (PD) Protection
PCS-915 provides independent pole disagreement FD element for PD protection of each bay
(includes BC/BS and each feeder). If pole disagreement binary input of bay n [BI_PD_@Bayn] is
energized, FD element for PD protection of bay n picks up, the positive supply to the output relays
is then available and wait for the tripping signal from PD protection element. The fault detector
output signal will last for 500ms after the fault detector element drop off.
Note!
For each bay, PD protection is necessary when pole discrepancy of corresponding breaker is
detected due to three phases not in same status.
Pole discrepancy protection is initiated by series-parallel connected auxiliary contacts of breaker

i.e. the binary input [BI_PD_@Bayn].
In addition to series-parallel connected auxiliary contacts of breaker, residual and negative

sequence current are used as auxiliary criteria.
3.8.3 Logic
The logic of pole discrepancy protection is shown as follows.

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.8-1 Logic of pole discrepancy protection
3I0_Bayn, I2_Bayn: residual and negative sequence current of bay n.
3.8.4 I/O Signal
1 BI_PD_@Bayn Binary input indicating breaker of bay n is in pole disagreement status
Binary input of enabling PD protection (it is configured when the function

2 EBI_PD setting “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is set as “Disable”), if it
is not configured, its default value is “1”
Binary input of disabling PD protection (it is configured when the

3 EBI_Out_PD function setting “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is set as
1 62PD.Op_Trp@Bayn PD protection of bay n operates
Alarm signal indicating that PD protection FD element of bay n picks up

2 @Bayn.62PD.Alm_Pkp for over 10s (i.e. pole disagreement binary input of bay n
[BI_PD_@Bayn] is energized for over 10s)
3.8.5 Settings
Protection Settings
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsPD Settings

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.8-3 PD protection settings
1 62PD.3I0_Set 0.05In~20.00In 0.01A Residual current setting for PD protection
Negtive-sequence current setting for PD

2 62PD.I2_Set 0.05In~20.00In 0.01A
protection
3 62PD.t_Op 0.000~10.000s 0.001s Time delay of PD protection
1: Enabling PD protection
4 62PD.En 0, 1 1
0: Disabling PD protection
1: Enabling pole disagreement protection

5 62PD.En_Init50BF 0,1 1
0: Disabling pole disagreement protection
1. [62PD.3I0_Set]
It should be larger than maximum residual current under maximum fault level condition.
2. [62PD.I2_Set]
It should be greater than maximum unbalance negative sequence current under maximum fault
level condition.
3. [62PD.t_Op]
It should be greater than maximum inconsistent time of three phase interrupters when breaker is in
the process of being closed.
Function Link
No. Symbol Remark
1: Enabling PD protection of bay n

1 @Bayn.Link_62PD
0: Disabling PD protection of bay n
For pole disagreement protection, the relation is “AND” among the function link
[@Bayn.Link_62PD], the corresponding enabling binary input [EBI_PD] and the corresponding
logic setting [62PD.En].
3.9 BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection (BFP)
PCS-915 provides independent FD element for BC/BS BFP, if any of the following conditions is

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
fulfilled, FD element for BC/BS BFP picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then
available and wait for the tripping signal from BC/BS BFP. The fault detector output signal will last
for 500ms after the fault detector element drop off.
1. BBP operates to trip BC/BS
2. Breaker failure initiating binary inputs [BI_BFI_@BCy_1] and [BI_BFI_@BCy_2],

([BI_BFI_@BSz_1] and [BI_BFI_@BSz_2]) are energized at the same time
3. BC/BS overcurrent protection operates (controlled by the logic setting [50/51.En_Init50BF])
4. BC/BS pole disagreement protection operates (controlled by the logic setting

[62PD.En_Init50BF])
Note!
settings.
In Section 3.9, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar. For a
bus coupler bay, “@BCy” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus coupler.
For a bus section bay, “@BSz” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus
section.
When tripping signal has been delivered to BC/BS breaker, while the breaker is failed to open
checked by the BC/BS current check element setting [BC.50BF.I_Set], BFP will operate to trip all
feeders connected to the two busbars (connected with the faulty BC/BS) after time delay of
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]. BC/BS breaker failure protection is controlled by voltage controlled element of
busbar differential protection (VCE_BBP) (Please refer to Section 3.3.2.2) if busbar voltage is
available and applied.
For the occasion that BS is at the edge of the protected zone, such as BS1 and BS2 in Figure
3.1-6, BS breaker failure initiating (BFI) logic is applied and it can output a contact to energize the
breaker failure initiating binary inputs [BI_BFI_@BSz_1] and [BI_BFI_@BSz_2] of another
PCS-915.
Takes BS1 in Figure 3.1-6 as an example, for PCS-915-A, if differential element of BB1 operates
and BS current of any phase is larger than 0.04In, the BS breaker failure initiating contact will
operate and it can energize the binary inputs [BI_BFI_@BS1_1] and [BI_BFI_@BS1_2] of
PCS-915-B.

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.9-1 The logic scheme of BFI of BS
Where:
[BO_BFI_BS1]: BS1 breaker failure initiating contact operates, it can be used to energize the
binary input [BI_BFI_@BS1_1] and [BI_BFI_@BS1_2] of another PCS-915.
Ia_BS1: Phase A current of BS1.
Ib_BS1: Phase B current of BS1.
Ic_BS1: Phase C current of BS1.
Diff_BB1: Differential element of BB1 (not controlled by VEC_BBP) operates, please refer to
Figure 3.3-4.
The logic scheme of BFI of BS2 is similar to it.
3.9.3 Logic
The logic of BC/BS BFP is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.1-2 as an example).
SIG VCE_BBP 1
SET Ia_BC1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]
SET Ib_BC1>[BC.50BF.I_Set] ≥1
SET Ic_BC1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]
SIG 87B.Op_Trp@BC1
EN [62PD.En_Init50BF]
&
SIG 62PD.Op_Trp@BC1
EN [50/51.En_Init50BF] [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]
& @BC1.50BF.Op_Trp@BB1
&
SIG 50/51.Op_Trp@BC1
&
BI [BI_BFI_@BC1_1] ≥1
& [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]
& @BC1.50BF.Op_Trp@BB2
BI [BI_BFI_@BC1_2]
SIG VCE_BBP 2
Figure 3.9-2 Logic of BC/BS BFP

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
Where:
VCE_BBP 1: voltage controlled element for BBP of BB1 (controlled by the logic setting
[87B.En_VCE]), please refer to Section 3.3.2.2.
VCE_BBP 2: voltage controlled element for BBP of BB2 (controlled by the logic setting
[87B.En_VCE]), please refer to Section 3.3.2.2.
3.9.4 I/O Signal
3 50/51.Op_Trp@BCy Overcurrent protection of BCy operates
4 50/51.Op_Trp@BSz Overcurrent protection of BSz operates
5 62PD.Op_Trp@BCy Pole disagreement protection of BCy operates
6 62PD.Op_Trp@BSz Pole disagreement protection of BSz operates
7 BI_BFI_@BCy_1 Binary input 1 of initiating BCy BFP
9 BI_BFI_@BSz_1 Binary input 1 of initiating BSz BFP
1 @BCy.50BF.Op_Trp@BBx BCy BFP operates to trip BBx
2 @BSz.50BF.Op_Trp@BBx BSz BFP operates to trip BBx
3 @BCy.Alm_BI_BFI Binary input of initiating BCy BFP is energized for over 10s.
4 @BSz.Alm_BI_BFI Binary input of initiating BSz BFP is energized for over 10s.
The common initiating contact of BFP of BCy is continually energized

5 @BCy.Alm_ChkBFI
for over 10s
The common initiating contact of BFP of BSz is continually energized

6 @BSz.Alm_ChkBFI
for over 10s
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BCy BFP picks up for over
7 @BCy.50BF.Alm_Pkp
10s
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BSz BFP picks up for over
8 @BSz.50BF.Alm_Pkp
10s
9 BO_BFI_BSz BSz breaker failure initiating contact operates
3.9.5 Settings
BC/BS Breaker failure Protection Setting

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsBC BFP Settings
Table 3.9-3 BC/BS breaker failure protection settings
1 BC.50BF.I_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Current setting for BC/BS BFP
2 BC.50BF.t_TrpBB 0.000~10.000s 0.001s Time delay of BC/BS BFP
1. [BC.50BF.I_Set]
It should be set as minimum fault current flowing through BC breaker. The change of power
system topology can influence the fault current after BBP operating.
2. [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]
It should be larger than the maximal arc-extinguishing time of BC breaker.
3.10 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection (BFP)
Feeder breaker failure protection is provided for each feeder bay. PCS-915 provides independent
FD element for feeder BFP, if any of the following conditions is fulfilled, FD element for feeder BFP
picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait for the tripping signal
from feeder BFP. The fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after the fault detector element
drop off.
1. BBP operates to trip feeder bay n
2. Binary input for initiating BFP of feeder bay n (Phase-segregated or three-phase tripping
contact) is energized.
3. Overcurrent protection of feeder bay n operates (controlled by the logic setting

[50/51.En_Init50BF])
4. Pole disagreement protection of feeder bay n operates (controlled by the logic setting
[62PD.En_Init50BF])
Note!
In Section 3.10, for a feeder bay, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding feeder bay.

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
Breaker failure protection is available for each feeder bay. When a breaker is determined failure to
trip, the BFP will operate to re-trip the breaker after time delay of [50BF.t_ReTrp]. If the fault is still
existed, the breaker failure protection will trip BC after time delay of [50BF.t_TrpBC] and all feeders
after time delay of [50BF.t_TrpBB]. BFP also provides the function to transfer trip the breaker of
the remote end of a line or intertrip the breakers on other sides of a main-transformer with the time
delay of [50BF.t_TrpBB].
3.10.2.1 Initiation contact
For each feeder bay, BFP can be initiated externally via binary inputs by phase-segregated
tripping contacts or three-phase tripping contacts of protective device for the corresponding feeder
bay.
1. Phase-segregated tripping contact
[BI_A_BFI_@Bayn]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase A of feeder bay n
[BI_B_BFI_@Bayn]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase B of feeder bay n
[BI_C_BFI_@Bayn]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase C of feeder bay n
2. Three-phase tripping contact
[BI_BFI_@Bayn]: The binary input for initiating BFP of three phases of feeder bay n.
3.10.2.2 Main-transformer Bay
For a main-transformer bay (if the function setting “Enable main-transformer bay” is set as
“Enable” for a bay, the bay will be regarded as connected to a transformer), there are following
addition features:
- Only three-phase breaker failure initiating (BFI) contact is provided
- the binary input of releasing voltage controlled element of breaker failure protection can be
enabled or disabled under the controlling of the function setting “Binary input of releasing
voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection”.
When a fault occurs on the low-voltage side of a transformer, but the breaker on the high-voltage
side is failed to open, if VCE_BFP (please refer to Section 3.10.2.4) of HV side can not operate,
the other tripping contact can be connected to the binary input of releasing voltage controlled
element of breaker failure protection to release the corresponding voltage controlled element.
3.10.2.3 Current criterion
1. Current criterion 1
Phase current is greater than the setting [Bayn.50BF.I_Set]
Residual current is greater than the setting [Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set]

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
Negative sequence current is greater than the setting i.e. [Bayn.50BF.I2_Set]
Current criterion 2 and current criterion 3 are optional. They can be determined by the logic setting
of [Bayn.50BF.En_3I0] and [Bayn.50BF.En_I2] respectively.
3.10.2.4 Voltage control element of breaker failure protection (VCE_BFP)
Voltage control element is used as an auxiliary condition.
The criteria are:
UP≤[50BF.U_VCE] (Equation 3.10-1)
3U0≥[50BF.3U0_VCE] (Equation 3.10-2)
U2≥[50BF.U2_VCE] (Equation 3.10-3)
Where:
UP: Phase voltage
3U0: Residual voltage
U2: Negative sequence voltage
[50BF.U_VCE]: Phase voltage setting for blocking BFP
[50BF.3U0_VCE]: Residual voltage setting for blocking BFP
[50BF.U2_VCE]: Negative sequence voltage setting for blocking BFP
If the logic setting [Bayn.50BF.Dis_VCE] is configured and is set as “0”, feeder breaker failure
protection of bay n is always blocked by voltage controlled element.
If the function setting “Voltage concerned functions” is set as “Disable” or the logic setting
[Bayn.50BF.Dis_VCE] is set as “1”, the voltage controlled blocking for feeder BFP of bay n is
released.
3.10.3 Logic
The logic of BFP is shown as follows.

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
SIG BBP operates to trip bay n
EN [62PD.En_Init50BF]
&
SIG 62PD.Op_Trp@Bayn
EN [50/51.En_Init50BF]
& ≥1
SIG 50/51.Op_Trp@Bayn
BI [BI_BFI_@Bayn]
&
≥1 ≥1
SET Ia_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I_Set]
&
BI [BI_A_BFI_@Bayn]
SET Ib_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I_Set]
&
BI [BI_B_BFI_@Bayn]
SET Ic_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I_Set]
&
BI [BI_C_BFI_@Bayn]
≥1 ≥1
EN [Bayn.50BF.En_3I0] & ≥1
&
SET 3I0_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set]
EN [Bayn.50BF.En_I2] & [50BF.t_ReTrp]

50BF.Op_ReTrp_@Bayn
&
SET I2_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I2_Set] [50BF.t_TrpBC]
50BF.Op_TrpBC
BI [EBI_BFP] &
[50BF.t_TrpBB]
EN [Link_50BF] & & 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx
EN [50BF.En] Op_TT_@Bayn
SIG VCE_BFP x
&
SIG Disconnector position of BBx
Figure 3.10-1 Logic of BFP (for the feeder that main transformer is not connected)
VCE_BFP x: voltage controlled element for BBP of BBx, please refer to Section 3.10.2.4.
Disconnector position of BBx: which busbar the bay is connected to (according to disconnector
position of the bay)

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.10-2 Logic of BFP (for the feeder that main transformer is connected)
3I0_Bayn: The residual current of bay n
I2_Bayn: The negative sequence current of bay n
Ia_Bayn: The phase A current of bay n
Ib_Bayn: The phase B current of bay n
Ic_Bayn: The phase C current of bay n
3.10.4 I/O Signal
1 50/51.Op_Trp@Bayn Overcurrent protection of bay n operates
2 62PD.Op_Trp@Bayn Pole disagreement protection of bay n operates
3 BI_BFI_@Bayn Binary input for initiating BFP of three phases of bay n
4 BI_A_BFI_@Bayn Binary input for initiating BFP of phase A of bay n
5 BI_B_BFI_@Bayn Binary input for initiating BFP of phase B of bay n
6 BI_C_BFI_@Bayn Binary input for initiating BFP of phase C of bay n

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element of breaker

7 BI_Rls_VCE_BFP_@Bayn
failure protection of bay n
Binary input of enabling feeder BFP (it is configured when the

8 EBI_BFP function setting “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is set as
Binary input of disabling feeder BFP (it is configured when the

9 EBI_Out_BFP function setting “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is set as
1 50BF.Op_ReTrp_@Bayn BFP of bay n operates to re-trip the breaker
2 50BF.Op_TrpBC BFP operates to trip BC breaker
3 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx BFP operates to trip BBx
EFP or BFP of bay n operates to initiate transfer trip to remote

4 Op_TT_@Bayn
circuit breaker
Binary input of initiating contact of BFP of bay n is energized for

5 @Bayn.Alm_BI_BFI
over 10s.
The common initiating contact of BFP of bay n is continually

6 @Bayn.Alm_ChkBFI
energized for over 10s

7 @Bayn.Alm_RlsVCE_BFP
failure protection of bay n is energized for over 10s.
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for feeder BFP of bay n

8 @Bayn.50BF.Alm_Pkp
Alarm signal indicating feeder BFP is disabled. If the logic setting

[50BF.En_Alm_Off] is set as “1”, once feeder BFP is disabled
9 50BF.Alm_Off (feeder BFP can be disabled by the corresponding enabling
binary input, function link or enabling logic setting), the alarm
signal indicating feeder BFP is disabled will be issued
3.10.5 Settings
Busbar Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsFdr BFP Settings
Table 3.10-3 Busbar protection settings
Time delay of feeder BFP operating to

1 50BF.t_ReTrp 0.000~10.000s 0.001s
re-trip breaker
2 50BF.t_TrpBC 0.000~10.000s 0.001s Time delay of feeder BFP operating to

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
trip BC breaker
Time delay of feeder BFP operating to

3 50BF.t_TrpBB 0.000~10.000s 0.001s
trip busbar zone
4 50BF.U_VCE 0~Un 0.01V Under voltage setting of VCE of BFP
5 50BF.3U0_VCE 0~Un 0.01V Residual voltage setting of VCE of BFP
Negative-sequence voltage setting of

6 50BF.U2_VCE 0~Un 0.01V
VCE of BFP
7 Bayn.50BF.I_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Phase current setting of BFP of bay n
8 Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Residual current setting of BFP of bay n
Negative sequence current setting of

9 Bayn.50BF.I2_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A
BFP of bay n
Residual current criterion of BFP of bay

10 Bayn.50BF.En_3I0 0, 1 1
n is enabled or not
Negative sequence current criterion of

11 Bayn.50BF.En_I2 0, 1 1
BFP of bay n is enabled or not
1: BFP of bay n is not controlled by VCE

of BFP
12 Bayn.50BF.Dis_VCE 0, 1 1
0: BFP of bay n is controlled by VCE of
BFP
1: Enabling feeder breaker failure

protection
13 50BF.En 0, 1 1
0: Disabling feeder breaker failure
protection
1: Alarm signal will be issued if feeder

BFP is disabled
14 50BF.En_Alm_Off 0,1 1
0: Alarm signal will not be issued if
feeder BFP is disabled
1. [50BF.t_ReTrp]
It should be larger than 100ms and smaller than the setting [50BF.t_TrpBC]. The recommended
value is 0.15s. The function of re-tripping target breaker can be disabled if it is set the same as
[50BF.t_TrpBC].
2. [50BF.t_TrpBC]
It should be larger than the sum of operating time of breaker and reset time of protective device
with certain margin. The recommended value is 250ms~350ms.
3. [50BF.t_TrpBB]
On the premise that BC breaker is tripped, the value of [50BF.t_TrpBB] should be greater than the

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
sum of operating time of BC breaker and reset time of protective device with certain margin. It
should be as short as possible on the premise of losing selectivity. The recommended value is
500ms~600ms.
4. [50BF.U_VCE]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when a symmetrical fault occurrs at the remote
end of the longest feeder but not operate in the lowest operation voltage. After the fault is cleared,
the protective device can reset reliably.
5. [50BF.3U0_VCE]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when an unsymmetrical fault occurrs at the
remote end of the longest line. It should be larger than maximum residual voltage in normal
operation mode.
6. [50BF.U2_VCE]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when an unsymmetrical fault occurrs at the
remote end of the longest line. It should be larger than maximum negative sequence voltage in
normal operation mode.
7. [Bayn.50BF.I_Set]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is a fault occurring at the remote end
of feeder or in LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be greater than
maximum load under maximum fault level condition. In case of complying maximum load current
will not meet the sensitivity requirement, sensitivity requirement has the priority.
8. [Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is an earth fault occurring at the
remote end of line or LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be greater
than the maximum residual current in normal operation mode.
9. [Bayn.50BF.I2_Set]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is a phase-to-phase fault occurring at
the remote end of line or LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be
greater than the maximum negative sequence current in normal operation mode.
10. [Bayn.50BF.En_3I0]
In order to improve the sensitivity of current criterion for asymmetric fault, this setting should be set
as “1”. Especially for transformer or transmission line adopting phase-segregated tripping logic.
11. [Bayn.50BF.En_I2]
In order to improve the sensitivity of current criterion for asymmetric fault, this setting should be set
as “1”. Especially for transformer or transmission line adopting phase-segregated tripping logic.
Function Link

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
No. Symbol Remark
1: Enabling feeder breaker failure protection

1 Link_50BF
0: Disabling feeder breaker failure protection
For feeder breaker failure protection, the relation is “AND” among the function link [Link_50BF],
the corresponding enabling binary input [EBI_BFP] and the corresponding logic setting [50BF.En].
3.11 Position of disconnector and circuit breaker
In a substation with double busbars layout, feeders may be switched from one busbar to the other
busbar during operation. Thus it is necessary to identify the real time topology of busbar correctly.
PCS-915 offers disconnector positions element and self-diagnosis function to assist in identifying
the real time busbar topology.
If BBn disconnector and BBm disconnector of the same feeder are closed at the same time, an
alarm signal [Alm_IntLinkx] will be issued simultaneously. If the two disconnectors returns to
normal condition, the alarm will reset automatically.
If an abnormality of disconnector position of bay n is detected, the disconnector position alarm

[@Bayn.Alm_DS] will be issued simultaneously in any of the following cases.
1. Current is detected in a feeder but the feeder has no disconnector positions for dual busbars
(the two disconnectors that the feeder connect to the two busbar are open). In this case, the
protective device will use the latest disconnector position instead and its validity will be
checked based on the current distribution of the system.
2. The discriminating zone differential current is larger than 0.08In due to the wrong disconnector
position, disconnector position alarm will be issued and the device can identify the correct
disconnector position based on the current distribution of system.
Note!
settings.
In Section 3.11, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar and
“@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay.
If any disconnector position alarm is issued, if the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_DS] is set as “1”
(refer to Section 3.3.5), once the abnormality of disconnector position disappears, the alarm will be
reset automatically. if the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_DS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
reset unless energizing the disconnector position confirm binary input [BI_ConfirmDS] or carry out
the disconnector position confirming command by navigating the path “Local Cmd”->“Confirm
Disconnector”.
Besides, in order to prevent the feeder from miss-operation caused by the lost of feeder
disconnector position, regardless which busbar zone does the fault occur in, the feeders of which
CT correction coefficient is not zero but no disconnector position can be detected will be tripped.
If the function setting “Dual-position for disconnector (breaker) status” is set as “Disable”, only
normally open auxiliary contact of disconnector (circuit breaker) is used to identify the position
status. If the function setting “Dual-position for disconnector (breaker) status” is set as “Enable”,
both normally open auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact of disconnector (circuit
breaker) are used to identify the position status.
If only normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is used to identify the position status,
once normally closed auxiliary contact connected binary input is energized, the corresponding
circuit breaker will be identified as open, otherwise it is closed.
If only normally open auxiliary contact of disconnector is used to identify the position status, once
normally open auxiliary contact connected binary input is energized, the corresponding
disconnector will be identified as closed, otherwise it is open.
If both normally open auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact of disconnector or
circuit breaker are used to identify the position status, the following table shows the principle.
Table 3.11-1 position status of disconnector or circuit breaker
Normally closed auxiliary

Normally open auxiliary contact position status
contact
0 1 Open
1 0 Closed
0 0 the last valid memorized position
1 1 Closed
If normally closed auxiliary contact of bay n circuit breaker is energized but current is still be
detected in corresponding bay n, an alarm signal [@Bayn.Alm_52b] will be issued without blocking
the protective device.
If the function link [@Bayn.Link_DS] is configured and it is set as “1”, The disconnector position
will be decided by [@Bayn.Link_DSBB1] and [@Bayn.Link_DSBB2], if [@Bayn.Link_DSBB1] is
set as “1”, BB1 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly, if [@Bayn.Link_DSBB2] is set
as “1”, BB2 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly.
When [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”, if [@Bayn.Link_DSBB1] and [@Bayn.Link_DSBB2] are set

as “1” at the same time, an alarm signal [Alm_IntLinkx] will be issued.
If the function link [@Bayn.Link_DS] is configured and it is set as “1”, [@Bayn.Link_DSBB1] and
[@Bayn.Link_DSBB2] are all set as “0”, but current is detected in bay n, disconnector position
alarm [@Bayn.Alm_DS] will be issued simultaneously.

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
The discriminating zone differential current is larger than 0.08In due to the wrong disconnector
position (judged by [@Bayn.Link_DS], [@Bayn.Link_DSBB1] and [@Bayn.Link_DSBB2]),
disconnector position alarm [@Bayn.Alm_DS] will be issued and the device can identify the
correct disconnector position based on the current distribution of system.
If both normally open auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker are
used to identify the position status, when circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance, the
corresponding function link [@Bayn.Link_Maintenance] should be set as “1” and the circuit
breaker will be regarded as open, otherwise the alarm signal [@Bayn.Alm_52a&52b] will be
issued once circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance.
3.11.2 I/O Signal
1 BI_89a_@BBx_@Bayn Normally open auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of bay n
2 BI_89b_@BBx_@Bayn Normally closed auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of bay n
3 BI_52a_@Bayn Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n
4 BI_52b_@Bayn Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n
5 BI_52a_Pha_@Bayn Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n
6 BI_52a_Phb_@Bayn Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n
7 BI_52a_Phc_@Bayn Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n
8 BI_52b_Pha_@Bayn Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n
9 BI_52b_Phb_@Bayn Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n
10 BI_52b_Phc_@Bayn Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n
11 BI_ConfirmDS Disconnector position confirm binary input
1 @Bayn.Alm_DS Disconnector position of bay n is abnormal.
BBn disconnector and BBm disconnector of the same feeder are closed
2 Alm_IntLinkx
at the same time
Normally closed auxiliary contact of bay n breaker is energized but

3 @Bayn.Alm_52b
current can still be detected in bay n
Normally closed and normally open auxiliary contact of bay n breaker is

energized or de-energized simultaneously for over 5s (if both normally
4 @Bayn.Alm_52a&52b
open auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit
breaker are used to identify the position status)
Normally closed and normally open auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector

5 @Bayn.Alm_89a&89b_@BBx
of bay n is energized or de-energized simultaneously for over s 5s

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
3.11.3 Settings
Function Link
No. Symbol Remark
1: Enforced disconnector position for bay n is enabled. The

disconnector position will be decided by [@Bayn.Link_DSBB1]
and [@Bayn.Link_DSBB2]
1 @Bayn.Link_DS
0: Enforced disconnector position for bay n is disabled. The
disconnector position will be decided by disconnector position
binary input
1: BB1 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly if

[@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”.
2 @Bayn.Link_DSBB1
0: BB1 disconnector of bay n is taken as open enforcedly if

[@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”
3 @Bayn.Link_DSBB2
1: Circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance

4 @Bayn.Link_Maintenance
0: Circuit breaker of bay n is not in maintenance
3.12 BC/BS breaker substitution and bypass breaker substitution

3.12.1.1 BC/BS breaker substitution
If BC/BS breaker is used temporarily to substitute one of feeder breakers through transfer bus, the
binary input [EBI_BC_As_BT_Mode] should be energized. The binary input
[EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT] should be energized or de-energized according to the busbar
arrangement. The polarity mark of feeder CT is on the busbar side, if the polarity mark of the
substituted BC/BS CT is on the busbar side, the binary input [EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT] should be
de-energized and BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminating zone differential current. If the
polarity mark of the substituting BC/BS CT is on the feeder side, the binary input
[EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT] should be energized and negative value of BC/BS current will be
calculated in discriminating zone differential current.
If BC/BS breaker is used temporarily to substitute one of feeder breakers, whether the positive
value or the negative value of the substituting BC/BS current is calculated in discriminating zone
differential current depends on the status of the binary input [EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT].
If substituting disconnector of BBx [BI_89a_@BBx_BT] is closed, the BC/BS breaker is

substituting through BBx, and the BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminating zone

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
differential current of BBx.
When BC/BS breaker is used to substitute any of feeder breakers, some protection elements
(such as SOTF protection, EFP and BFP) of BC/BS will quit automatically, but overcurrent
protection and pole disagreement protection are still reserved, which can be used as the
protection function of the substituted feeder. In addition, some functions for BC/BS breaker is used
as a tie breaker connecting two busbars are also quit (such as: tripping BC/BS breaker when
busbar internal fault happens).
Note!
settings.
In Section 3.12, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar.
Note!
[EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT] should be energized prior to [EBI_BC_As_BT_Mode].
1. Energizing the binary input [EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT]
Figure 3.12-1 BC/BS breaker substituting through BB2
The polarity mark of BC/BS CT is on the feeder side, the binary input [EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT]
should be energized. Negative value of BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminative zone
differential current of BB2.
2. De-energizing the binary input [EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT]

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.12-2 BC/BS breaker substituting through BB1
The polarity mark of BC/BS CT is on the busbar side, the binary input [EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT]
should not be energized. Positve value of BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminative zone
differential current of BB1.
3.12.1.2 Bypass breaker substitution
If dedicated bypass breaker is used to substitute one of feeder breakers through transfer bus, the
polarity mark of bypass breaker CT should be on the busbar side. If bypass disconnector of BBx is
closed, bypass breaker current will be calculated in discriminating zone differential current of BBx
(bypass breaker current will not be calculated in check zone differential current).
If bypass disconnector of BB1 and BB2 are closed at the same time, the alarm signal
[Alm_IntLink1] will be issued. If transfer bus disconnector of bay n is closed, BB1 disconnector or
BB2 disconnector of bay n is closed, and circuit breaker of bay n is closed, the alarm signal
[Alm_IntLink2] or [Alm_IntLink3] will be issued.

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
3.12.2 I/O Signal
1 BI_89a_@BBx_BT Normally open auxiliary contact of substituting disconnector of BBx
Binary input indicating BC/BS breaker is used to substitute one of

2 EBI_BC_As_BT_Mode
feeder breakers
Reverse the polarity mark of BC/BS CT when BC/BS breaker is used

3 EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT
to substitute one of feeder breakers
3.13 GOOSE and SV function
PCS-915 can accomplish the control of primary equipment, status exchange of each protection
device and acquisition of binary inputs via GOOSE network. GOOSE receiving links
(@Bayn.Link_GS_RL), GOOSE tripping links (@Bayn.Link_GS_Trp), GOOSE inter-tripping links
(@Bayn.Link_GS_IntTrp) and GOOSE breaker failure initiating links (@Bayn.Link_GS_BFI) are
provided for each bay which is used to control the GOOSE binary input and output.
GOOSE and SV module (NR1136A) can be used for GOOSE & SV message transmission by
point-to-point connection or via LAN. It can receive the sampled values (SV) from merging unit,
and it can also receive GOOSE signals from or send GOOSE signals to merging unit.
In order to prevent the whole protection device from being blocked for abnormality of any data
channel, only some relevant protection elements is blocked selectively according to the different
abnormalities, the specific principle is as follows:
1) If the SV message is invalid, the invalid SV message will be displayed and it will not be
cleared.

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
2) If any voltage channel is abnormal, the protection will not be blocked and the corresponding
voltage controlled element will be released.
3) If current channel of feeder m is abnormal, busbar differential protection will be disabled, the
integrated protections (such as feeder breaker failure protection, overcurrent protection and
pole disagreement protection) of concerned bay will be disabled automatically whereas the
protections of other healthy bays remains available.
4) If current channel of BC is abnormal, the corresponding discriminative zone differential

elements will be blocked.
If bay n is in service, set the function link [@Bayn.Link_Enable] as “1”. if bay n is out of service, set
the function link [@Bayn.Link_Enable] as “0”, the current of the corresponding bay will be
excluded for differential protection calculation and all the relevant alarm signals of bay n will be
shielded. If bay n is out of service ([@Bayn.Link_Enable]=0) and current is still detected (larger
than 0.04In) in bay n, an alarm signal [@Bayn.Alm_Out] will be issued and the current will be
included for differential protection calculation.
Note!
settings.
3.13.1 I/O Signal
Bay n is out of service ([@Bayn.Link_Enable]=0), but current is still

1 @Bayn.Alm_Out
detected (larger than 0.04In) in bay n
Bay n is in service ([@Bayn.Link_Enable]=1) but the corresponding

2 @Bayn.Alm_Maintenance
MU is in maintenance state
Network A of GOOSE link xx is disconnected, the protection will not

3 @GOOSExx.GAlm_NetADisc
be blocked
Network B of GOOSE link xx is disconnected, the protection will not

4 @GOOSExx.GAlm_NetBDisc
be blocked
The alarm signal will be issued if any of the following conditions is

satisfied.
Configuration version of two ends (the GOOSE receiving end and
5 @GOOSExx.GAlm_CfgUnmatch
the GOOSE sending end) are inconsistent.
The number of data of received message is not equal to that
configured in the receiving control block.

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
Failed to analyze the data segment of received message. For

example, the data type of received message is mismatch with that
Internal GOOSE configuration file of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and SV

6 Bx.GAlm_CfgFile
module that located in slot No.x) is wrong
Network storm occurs on GOOSE network A of Bx (Bx means

7 Bx.GAlm_NetAStorm
GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x)
Network storm occurs on GOOSE network B of Bx (Bx means

8 Bx.GAlm_NetBStorm
Sampled values of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and SV module that

9 Bx.SVAlm_TrigOscillog
located in slot No.x) errors to trigger wave record function
Internal SV configuration file of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and SV

10 Bx.SVAlm_CfgFile
Synchronism signal of Bx is lost (Bx means GOOSE and SV

11 Bx.SVAlm_SynLoss
module that located in slot No.x)
12 @Bayn.SVAlm_NetADisc Network A of MU of bay n is disconnected
13 @Bayn.SVAlm_NetBDisc Network B of MU of bay n is disconnected
Sampled values of bay n error (time over, decoding error or

14 @Bayn.SVAlm_Data
interpolation time scale error)
15 @Bayn.SVAlm_SynLoss The corresponding MU of bay n lose synchronism signal
16 @Bayn.SVAlm_InvalidData the sampled data from corresponding MU of bay n is invalid
17 @Bayn.SVAlm_ChJitter Sampling frame jittering alarm signal
18 @Bayn.SVAlm_ChTimeLag Channel delay of bay n changes or out of range
“@GOOSExx” is the name of GOOSE link xx.
3.13.2 Settings
Function Link
No. Symbol Remark
1: Bay n is put into service.

1 @Bayn.Link_Enable 0: Bay n isout of service.
It is configured when digital sampling mode is adopted.
GOOSE Link
Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Links
Table 3.13-3 GOOSE link

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory
No. Symbol Remark
GOOSE receiving link of bay n, GOOSE binary input signal of bay

1 @Bayn.Link_GS_RL
n can not be received unless it is set as “1”
GOOSE tripping link of bay n, GOOSE tripping output signal of

2 @Bayn.Link_GS_Trp
bay n can not be sent unless it is set as “1”
GOOSE inter-tripping link of bay n, GOOSE inter-tripping output

3 @Bayn.Link_GS_IntTrp
signal of bay n can not be sent unless it is set as “1”
GOOSE breaker failure initiating link of bay n, GOOSE breaker

4 @Bayn.Link_GS_BFI failure initiating output signal of bay n can not be sent unless it is
set as “1”

Date: 2011-05-25
3 Operation Theory

Date: 2011-05-25
4 Supervision
4 Supervision
Table of Contents
4 Supervision ..................................................................................... 4-a
4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Protective Device Supervision ....................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1 Hardware supervision .......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.2 Opto-coupler Supply Supervision ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.2.3 Binary output supervision .................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.4 Setting supervision .............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.5 Test Mode Supervision ........................................................................................................ 4-2
4.2.6 Hardware Configuration Supervision................................................................................... 4-2
4.3 AC Circuit Supervision ................................................................................... 4-2

4.3.1 Voltage and current drift supervision and auto-adjustment ................................................. 4-2
4.3.2 Sample supervision ............................................................................................................. 4-2
4.4 Secondary Circuit Supervision ...................................................................... 4-2

4.4.1 Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) .............................................................................. 4-2
4.4.2 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) ............................................................................. 4-2
4.4.3 Disconnector position supervision ....................................................................................... 4-2
4.5 Handle Alarm ................................................................................................... 4-3

4.5.1 List of self-supervision report............................................................................................... 4-3
4.5.2 Self-Supervision Alarm List.................................................................................................. 4-5
4.5.3 Repairmen suggestion of self-supervision report ................................................................ 4-8
Table of Tables
Table 4.5-1 Self-supervision report ........................................................................................... 4-3
Table 4.5-2 Equipment self-check alarm list............................................................................. 4-5
Table 4.5-3 Repairmen suggestion ............................................................................................ 4-8

Date: 2011-05-25
4 Supervision

Date: 2011-05-25
4 Supervision
4.1 Overview
PCS-915 is a microprocessor based busbar protection which can provide successive automatic
supervision to the protected object to ensure the power system can quickly restore from any fault
to normal state. When the device is in energizing process before the LED “HEALTHY” is lightened,
the equipment needs to be checked to ensure no errors. Therefore, the automatic supervision
function, which checks the health of the protection system when startup and during normal
operation, plays an important role.
A minor abnormality may block a certain number of protections functions while the other functions
can still work and alarm output contacts [BO_ALM] in PWR module will be given. However, if
severe hardware failure or abnormality are detected, all protection functions will be blocked and
the LED “HEALTHY” will be extinguished and blocking output contacts [BO_FAIL] in PWR module
will be given. The protective device then cannot work normally and maintenance is required to
eliminate the failure.
When an abnormality or a failure is detected by automatic supervision, besides alarm output

contacts or blocking output contacts are energized, it is also followed with an LCD message and
LED indication, at the same time event recording will record the failure alarm which can be viewed
in event recording report and be printed.
4.2 Protective Device Supervision
4.2.1 Hardware supervision

The automatic supervision function can provide monitoring of all chips on protection DSP module
and fault detector DSP module to ensure they are healthy. Corresponding alarm signal
[ProtBrd.Fail_DSP] or [FDBrd.Fail_DSP] will be issued with the device being blocked if any
damages or errors are dectected.
4.2.2 Opto-coupler Supply Supervision

The automatic supervision can continuously monitor the positive power supply of opto-coupler, if a
failure or damage is detected, the alarm signal [Bx.Alm_OptoDC] will be issued (x is the slot No. of
corresponding binary input module).
4.2.3 Binary output supervision

The state of binary outputs of each BO module is continuously monitored. If any abnormality is
detected, the alarm signals [Bx.Fail_Output] will be issued with device being blocked (x is the slot
No. of corresponding BO module).
4.2.4 Setting supervision

The relay has 10 setting groups, while only one is active at the same time. The settings of active
setting group are checked, if any is out of setting scopes, a corresponding alarm signal
[Fail_Setting_OvRange] will be issued with the protective device be blocked.
If the EEPROM on protection DSP module or fault detector DSP module is damaged, it will lead to

Date: 2011-05-25
4 Supervision
any summation error of all setting groups, the alarms [FDBrd.Fail_Settings] or

[ProtBrd.Fail_Settings] will be issued with the protective device blocked.
4.2.5 Test Mode Supervision

When the protection device is set to test mode by configuring the corresponding logic setting, the
alarm signal [Alm_CommTest] is issued without blocking device.
4.2.6 Hardware Configuration Supervision

Module configuration is checked automatically during device initialization, if the plug-in module
configuration is not consistent with the design drawing of a specific project, the alarm signal
[Fail_BoardConfig] is issued with the device being blocked.
4.3 AC Circuit Supervision
4.3.1 Voltage and current drift supervision and auto-adjustment

The voltage and current drift are influenced by the variation of temperature or other environment
factors. PCS-915 can continually and automatically trace the drift value and adjust it to normal
value.
4.3.2 Sample supervision

The device can provide monitoring of AC current and voltage samplings for protection DSP
module and fault detector DSP module. If the detected values of bay n are wrong or inconsistent,
an alarm [@Bayn.Fail_Sample] will be issued and the relay will be blocked.
4.4 Secondary Circuit Supervision
4.4.1 Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS)

The VTS logic in the relay is used to detect the VT secondary circuit to ensure that voltage
measured is the actual value of power system. When VT failure is detected, device can
automatically adjust the configuration of protective elements of which the stability would be
affected and might lead to mal-operation. Please refer to corresponding content in Chapter 3 for
detail.
4.4.2 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS)

The CTS logic can detect the CT secondary circuit to ensure the measured current is the actual
value of power system. The main purpose of CTS is to ensure the integrity of the CT circuits
maintaining the performance of protective equipment. Please refer to corresponding content in
Chapter 3 for details.
4.4.3 Disconnector position supervision

Disconnector position is monitored by the automatic supervision function to ensure the correct
operation of protective device. Please refer to Section “Position of disconnector and circuit

Date: 2011-05-25
4 Supervision
breaker” in Chapter 3 for details.
4.5 Handle Alarm
PCS-915 can provide self-supervision of hardware circuit and device operation status. When any
unnormal condition is detected, the fault information or report can be displayed and a
corresponding alarm will be issued.
Note!
If alarm signal is issued with equipment being blocked, please try to make a fault diagnosis
by referring the issued alarm messages but not simply reboot or re-power the relay. If user
cannot find the failure reason on site, please inform the manufacturer or the agent for
maintenance.
4.5.1 List of self-supervision report

Table 4.5-1 Self-supervision report
Indicator LED
No. Alarm Message
HEALTHY MISC_ALM VT/CT_ALM DS_ALM
1 Fail_Setting_OvRange OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
2 Fail_BoardConfig OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
3 @Bayn.Fail_Sample OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
4 @BBx.Fail_VoltSample OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
5 ProtBrd.Fail_Sample OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
6 FDBrd.Fail_Sample OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
7 Bx.Fail_Output OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
8 ProtBrd.Fail_Settings OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
9 FDBrd.Fail_Settings OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
10 Fail_Setting OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
11 Fail_Setting_CRC OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
12 ProtBrd.Fail_DSP OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
13 FDBrd.Fail_DSP OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
14 Alm_CommTest OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
15 Fail_Pkp OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
16 Alm_Maintenance GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
17 Bx.Alm_OptoDC GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
18 87B.Alm_BI_Blk GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
19 87B.Alm_Pkp_Bias GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF

Date: 2011-05-25
4 Supervision
Indicator LED
No. Alarm Message
20 87B.Alm_Pkp_DPFC GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
21 AlmH_CTS GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF
22 @BCy.AlmH_CTS GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF
23 AlmL_CTS GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
24 @BCy.AlmL_CTS GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
25 @BBx.AlmH_CTS GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF
26 @BBx.AlmL_CTS GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
27 @BBx.Alm_VTS GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF
28 @BBx.Alm_VCE GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
29 87B.Alm_Off GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
30 @Bayn.Alm_Cls GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
31 @BCy.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
32 @BSz.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
33 @Bayn.51P.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
34 @Bayn.51G.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
35 @Bayn.62PD.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
36 @BCy.Alm_BI_BFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
37 @BSz.Alm_BI_BFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
38 @BCy.Alm_ChkBFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
39 @BSz.Alm_ChkBFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
40 @BCy.50BF.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
41 @BSz.50BF.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
42 @Bayn.Alm_BI_BFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
43 @Bayn.Alm_ChkBFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
44 @Bayn.Alm_RlsVCE_BFP GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
45 @Bayn.50BF.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
46 50BF.Alm_Off GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
47 @Bayn.Alm_DS GREEN OFF OFF YELLOW
48 Alm_IntLinkx GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
49 @Bayn.Alm_52b GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
50 @Bayn.Alm_52a&52b GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
51 @Bayn.Alm_89a&89b_@BBx GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
52 @Bayn.Alm_Out GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
53 @Bayn.Alm_Maintenance GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF

Date: 2011-05-25
4 Supervision
Indicator LED
No. Alarm Message
54 @Bayn.SVAlm_NetADisc GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
55 @Bayn.SVAlm_NetBDisc GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
56 @Bayn.SVAlm_Data GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
57 @Bayn.SVAlm_SynLoss GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
58 @Bayn.SVAlm_InvalidData GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
59 @Bayn.SVAlm_ChJitter GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
60 @Bayn.SVAlm_ChTimeLag GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
61 Bx.SVAlm_TrigOscillog GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
62 Bx.SVAlm_CfgFile GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
63 Bx.SVAlm_SynLoss GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
64 @GOOSExx.GAlm_NetADisc GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
65 @GOOSExx.GAlm_NetBDisc GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
66 @GOOSExx.GAlm_CfgUnmatch GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
67 Bx.GAlm_CfgFile GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
68 Bx.GAlm_NetAStorm GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
69 Bx.GAlm_NetBStorm GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
4.5.2 Self-Supervision Alarm List

Table 4.5-2 Equipment self-check alarm list
No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
1 Fail_Setting_OvRange Setting value is out of setting scope.
Mismatch between the configuration of plug-in boards and the

2 Fail_BoardConfig
designing drawing of a specific project
3 @Bayn.Fail_Sample Sampled value of bay n is different between two DSP modules
Sampling value of voltage of BBx is different between two DSP

4 @BBx.Fail_VoltSample
modules
5 ProtBrd.Fail_Sample Sampled value of protection DSP module errors
6 FDBrd.Fail_Sample Sampled value of fault detector DSP module errors
Driving transistors of binary output module located in slot No.x

7 Bx.Fail_Output
are damaged
8 ProtBrd.Fail_Settings The EEPROM in protection DSP module is damaged.
9 FDBrd.Fail_Settings The EEPROM in fault detector DSP module is damaged.
The EEPROM in protection DSP module or fault detector DSP

10 Fail_Setting
module is damaged
11 Fail_Setting_CRC CRC check for settings errors

Date: 2011-05-25
4 Supervision
12 ProtBrd.Fail_DSP DSP chip on protection DSP module is damaged.
13 FDBrd.Fail_DSP DSP chip on fault detector DSP module is damaged.
14 Alm_CommTest The relay is in test mode.
15 Fail_Pkp Device is blocked for over 10s
Alarm signal indicating that the equipment is in maintenance

16 Alm_Maintenance
state (the binary input [BI_Maintenance] is energized
Power supply of the opto-couplers for binary input module

17 Bx.Alm_OptoDC
located in slot No.x is abnormal.
18 87B.Alm_BI_Blk External binary input of blocking BBP is energized for over 1s
Alarm signal indicating that differential current FD element picks

19 87B.Alm_Pkp_Bias
up for over 10s
Alarm signal indicating that DPFC voltage FD element or DPFC

20 87B.Alm_Pkp_DPFC
current FD element picks up for over 10s
21 AlmH_CTS CT circuit failure
22 @BCy.AlmH_CTS BCy CT circuit failure
23 AlmL_CTS CT circuit abnormality
24 @BCy.AlmL_CTS BCy CT circuit abnormality
25 @BBx.AlmH_CTS BBx CT circuit failure alarm
26 @BBx.AlmL_CTS BBx CT circuit abnormality alarm
27 @BBx.Alm_VTS BBx VT circuit failure
28 @BBx.Alm_VCE VCE (of BBP or BFP) of BBx picks up for over 3s
Alarm signal indicating BBP is disabled. If the logic setting

[87B.En_Alm_Off] is set as “1”, once BBP is disabled (BBP can
29 87B.Alm_Off be disabled by the corresponding enabling binary input, function
link or enabling logic setting), the alarm signal indicating BBP is
disabled will be issued
30 @Bayn.Alm_Cls Closing binary input [BI_Cls_@Bayn] is energized for over 1s
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for SOTF protection of

31 @BCy.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp
BCy picks up for over 10s
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for SOTF protection of

32 @BSz.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp
BSz picks up for over 10s
Alarm signal indicating that phase overcurrent FD element of

33 @Bayn.51P.Alm_Pkp
bay n picks up for over 10s
Alarm signal indicating that ground overcurrent FD element of

34 @Bayn.51G.Alm_Pkp
bay n picks up for over 10s
Alarm signal indicating that PD protection FD element of bay n

35 @Bayn.62PD.Alm_Pkp picks up for over 10s (i.e. pole disagreement binary input of bay
n [BI_PD_@Bayn] is energized for over 10s)

Date: 2011-05-25
4 Supervision
36 @BCy.Alm_BI_BFI Binary input of initiating BCy BFP is energized for over 10s.
37 @BSz.Alm_BI_BFI Binary input of initiating BSz BFP is energized for over 10s.
The common initiating contact of BFP of BCy is continually

38 @BCy.Alm_ChkBFI
The common initiating contact of BFP of BSz is continually

39 @BSz.Alm_ChkBFI
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BCy BFP picks up for
40 @BCy.50BF.Alm_Pkp
over 10s
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BSz BFP picks up for
41 @BSz.50BF.Alm_Pkp
over 10s
Binary input of initiating contact of BFP of bay n is energized for

42 @Bayn.Alm_BI_BFI
over 10s.
The common initiating contact of BFP of bay n is continually

43 @Bayn.Alm_ChkBFI

failure protection of bay n is energized for over 10s.
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for feeder BFP of bay n

45 @Bayn.50BF.Alm_Pkp
Alarm signal indicating feeder BFP is disabled. If the logic setting

[50BF.En_Alm_Off] is set as “1”, once feeder BFP is disabled
46 50BF.Alm_Off (feeder BFP can be disabled by the corresponding enabling
binary input, function link or enabling logic setting), the alarm
signal indicating feeder BFP is disabled will be issued
47 @Bayn.Alm_DS Disconnector position of bay n is abnormal.
BBn disconnector and BBm disconnector of the same feeder are

48 Alm_IntLinkx
closed at the same time
Normally closed auxiliary contact of bay n breaker is energized

49 @Bayn.Alm_52b
but current can still be detected in bay n
Normally closed and normally open auxiliary contact of bay n

50 @Bayn.Alm_52a&52b
breaker is energized or de-energized simultaneously for over 5s
Normally closed and normally open auxiliary contact of BBx

51 @Bayn.Alm_89a&89b_@BBx disconnector of bay n is energized or de-energized
simultaneously for over s 5s
Bay n is out of service ([@Bayn.Link_Enable]=0), but current is

52 @Bayn.Alm_Out
still detected (larger than 0.04In) in bay n
Bay n is in service ([@Bayn.Link_Enable]=1) but the

corresponding MU is in maintenance state
54 @Bayn.SVAlm_NetADisc Network A of MU of bay n is disconnected
55 @Bayn.SVAlm_NetBDisc Network B of MU of bay n is disconnected

Date: 2011-05-25
4 Supervision
Sampled values of bay n error (time over, decoding error or

56 @Bayn.SVAlm_Data
interpolation time scale error)
57 @Bayn.SVAlm_SynLoss the corresponding MU of bay n lose synchronism signal
58 @Bayn.SVAlm_InvalidData the sampled data from corresponding MU of bay n is invalid
59 @Bayn.SVAlm_ChJitter Sampling frame jittering alarm signal
60 @Bayn.SVAlm_ChTimeLag Channel delay of bay n changes or out of range
Sampled values of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and SV module that

located in slot No.x) errors to trigger wave record function
Internal SV configuration file of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and SV

62 Bx.SVAlm_CfgFile
Synchronism signal of Bx is lost (Bx means GOOSE and SV

63 Bx.SVAlm_SynLoss
module that located in slot No.x)
Network A of GOOSE link xx is disconnected, the protection will

64 @GOOSExx.GAlm_NetADisc
not be blocked
Network B of GOOSE link xx is disconnected, the protection will

65 @GOOSExx.GAlm_NetBDisc
not be blocked
The alarm signal will be issued if any of the following conditions

is satisfied.
Configuration version of two ends (the GOOSE receiving end
and the GOOSE sending end) are inconsistent.
66 @GOOSExx.GAlm_CfgUnmatch The number of data of received message is not equal to that
Failed to analyze the data segment of received message. For
example, the data type of received message is mismatch with
that configured in the receiving control block.
Internal GOOSE configuration file of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and

67 Bx.GAlm_CfgFile
SV module that located in slot No.x) is wrong
Network storm occurs on GOOSE network A of Bx (Bx means

68 Bx.GAlm_NetAStorm
Network storm occurs on GOOSE network B of Bx (Bx means

69 Bx.GAlm_NetBStorm
4.5.3 Repairmen suggestion of self-supervision report

Table 4.5-3 Repairmen suggestion
No. Self-supervision Report Suggestion
1 Fail_Setting_OvRange
Put the protective device out of service at once. Inform the
2 Fail_BoardConfig
factory or agency to maintain it.
3 @Bayn.Fail_Sample

Date: 2011-05-25
4 Supervision
4 @BBx.Fail_VoltSample
5 ProtBrd.Fail_Sample
6 FDBrd.Fail_Sample
7 Bx.Fail_Output
8 ProtBrd.Fail_Settings
9 FDBrd.Fail_Settings
10 Fail_Setting
11 Fail_Setting_CRC
12 ProtBrd.Fail_DSP
13 FDBrd.Fail_DSP
No special treatment is needed, and only wait for the completion

14 Alm_CommTest
of testing
15 Fail_Pkp Please refer to other alarm signal to confirm the blocking reason
16 Alm_Maintenance Check the binary input [BI_Maintenance]
17 Bx.Alm_OptoDC Check the power circuit of the DC module and I/O module
18 87B.Alm_BI_Blk Check the binary input of blocking BBP
19 87B.Alm_Pkp_Bias
Check CT secondary circuit includes CT polarity
20 87B.Alm_Pkp_DPFC
21 AlmH_CTS
22 @BCy.AlmH_CTS
23 AlmL_CTS
Check CT secondary circuit
24 @BCy.AlmL_CTS
25 @BBx.AlmH_CTS
26 @BBx.AlmL_CTS
27 @BBx.Alm_VTS
Check VT secondary circuit
28 @BBx.Alm_VCE
29 87B.Alm_Off Check whether BBP is disabled
Check whether binary input of reclosing of bay n is always

30 @Bayn.Alm_Cls
energized
31 @BCy.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp Check whether the setting [50SOTF.I_Set] is reasonable and

32 @BSz.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp check whether the measured current equals to the actual current
Check whether the setting [@Bayn.50/51P.I_Set] is reasonable

33 @Bayn.51P.Alm_Pkp and check whether the measured current equals to the actual
current
Check whether the setting [@Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set] is

34 @Bayn.51G.Alm_Pkp
reasonable and check whether the measured current equals to

Date: 2011-05-25
4 Supervision
the actual current
35 @Bayn.62PD.Alm_Pkp Check the corresponding pole disagreement binary input
36 @BCy.Alm_BI_BFI
Check the contact of initiating BC BFP externally
37 @BSz.Alm_BI_BFI
38 @BCy.Alm_ChkBFI
Check the contact of initiating BS BFP externally
39 @BSz.Alm_ChkBFI
Check the contact of initiating BC BFP externally and check

40 @BCy.50BF.Alm_Pkp whether the protective element (which can initiate BC BFP) drops
off.
Check the contact of initiating BS BFP externally and check

41 @BSz.50BF.Alm_Pkp whether the protective element (which can initiate BS BFP) drops
off.
42 @Bayn.Alm_BI_BFI
Check the contact of initiating feeder BFP externally
43 @Bayn.Alm_ChkBFI
Check the contact of releasing voltage controlled element of

breaker failure protection of bay n
Check the contact of initiating feeder BFP externally and check

45 @Bayn.50BF.Alm_Pkp whether the protective element (which can initiate feeder BFP)
drops off
46 50BF.Alm_Off Check whether BFP is disabled
47 @Bayn.Alm_DS
Check auxiliary contact of disconnector
48 Alm_IntLinkx
49 @Bayn.Alm_52b
Check auxiliary contact of circuit breaker of bay n
50 @Bayn.Alm_52a&52b
51 @Bayn.Alm_89a&89b_@BBx Check auxiliary contact of disconnector of bay n
Check whether bay n is in service but the corresponding function

52 @Bayn.Alm_Out
link [@Bayn.Link_Enable] is set as “0”
54 @Bayn.SVAlm_NetADisc
55 @Bayn.SVAlm_NetBDisc
56 @Bayn.SVAlm_Data
Check the corresponding MU, check the optical fiber connected
57 @Bayn.SVAlm_SynLoss
to it.
58 @Bayn.SVAlm_InvalidData
59 @Bayn.SVAlm_ChJitter
60 @Bayn.SVAlm_ChTimeLag
62 Bx.SVAlm_CfgFile Inform commissioning personnel to check the SV configuration

Date: 2011-05-25
4 Supervision
file
Check the corresponding synchronism source, check the optical

63 Bx.SVAlm_SynLoss
fiber connected to it.
64 @GOOSExx.GAlm_NetADisc Check the circuit breaker controller and switch, check the optical
65 @GOOSExx.GAlm_NetBDisc fiber connected to them
66 @GOOSExx.GAlm_CfgUnmatch Inform commissioning personnel to check the GOOSE

67 Bx.GAlm_CfgFile configuration file
68 Bx.GAlm_NetAStorm
Check the corresponding GOOSE network
69 Bx.GAlm_NetBStorm

Date: 2011-05-25
4 Supervision

Date: 2011-05-25
Table of Contents
5 Meaurement and Recording........................................................... 5-a
5.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 Measurement ................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 Analogue input quantities of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 ........................................ 5-1
5.2.2 Phase angle of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 ............................................................. 5-2
5.2.3 Debug values of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 ........................................................... 5-2
5.3 Event & fault Records ..................................................................................... 5-3

5.3.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3.2 Event Recording .................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.3.3 Disturbance and Fault Recording ........................................................................................ 5-3
5.3.4 Present Recording ............................................................................................................... 5-4

Date: 2011-05-24

Date: 2011-05-24
5.1 General Description
PCS-915 busbar protection can provide auxiliary functions such as on-line data metering, binary
input status, event and disturbance recording, to meet the demands of the modern power grid
requirements.
5.2 Measurement
PCS-915 can provide continuous measurements of analogue input quantities. The measurement
data shown below is displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or by the software interface on
the local or remote PC. The analog quantities will be displayed in RMS values of the secondary
side of CT.
Equipment samples 24 points per cycle. The RMS value is calculate in each interval and the LCD
display will be updated in every 0.5 second.
Users can view the measured data on LCD by navigating the menu “Measurements”, or by
PCS-PC software or substation automatic system (SAS) software. By navigating the path
“Settings”->“Product Setup” ->“Device Setting”, primary or secondary sampled values can be
selected to display by configuring the setting [Opt_DisplayValue].
PCS-915M has two DSP module which are protection DSP module (DSP module 1) and fault
detector DSP module (DSP module 2), the sampling values of both modules can be displayed on
LCD through different access menu.
Note!
If the device setting [Opt_DisplayValue] is not configured, the sampled values are
displayed as secondary value by default. If the setting is set as “0”, the sampled values are
displayed as primary value, if this setting is set as “1”, the sampled values are displayed as
secondary value.
Note!
The bay label of displayed sampled values will change according to the label settings of
each bay and busbar. In section 5.2, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding busbar and “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding
bay.
5.2.1 Analogue input quantities of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2
Item Rotation Description
Id_CZ A,B,C Three-phase check zone differential currents

Date: 2011-05-24
Id_@BBx A,B,C Three-phase discriminating zone differential currents of BBx
UP_@BBx A,B,C Three phase voltages of BBx
IP_@Bayn A,B,C Three phase currents of bay n
Access path:
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements1Measured Values
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements2Measured Values
5.2.2 Phase angle of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2

When voltage is sampled by the device and phase A voltage of BB1 is larger than a certain value,
the phase A voltage of BB1 will be taken as a reference. If the phase A voltage of BB1 is smaller
than the certain value and the phase A voltage of BB2 is larger than the certain value, the phase A
voltage of BB2 will be taken as a reference. If the phase A voltage of BB1 and BB2 are both
smaller than the certain value, phase A voltage of BB1 is taken as a reference.
When voltage is not sampled by the device, if the currents of some feeder are larger than a
certain value, the phase A current of the feeder (takes the feeder whose number is minimal) will
be taken as a reference.
If the phase A voltage of BB1 is taken as a reference, the displayed value

of“AngRef” is “0”, if phase A voltage of BB2 is taken as a reference, the
displayed value of “AngRef” is “1”.
AngRef
If the phase A current of feeder m is taken as a reference, the displayed
value of “AngRef” is “m” (m=01, 02, 03, ……), if all the currents are
smaller than a certain value, the displayed value of “AngRef” is “0”.
Ang(IP)_@Bayn A,B,C The phase angle of current of bay n
Ang(UP)_@BBx A,B,C The phase angle of voltage of BBx
Access path:
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements1Phase Angle
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements2Phase Angle
5.2.3 Debug values of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2

The debug values are usually provided for commission person for reference.
I2_@Bayn Negative sequence current of bay n
3I0_@Bayn Residual current of bay n
U2_@BBx Negative sequence voltage of BBx
3U0_@BBx Residual voltage of BBx
Access path:

Date: 2011-05-24
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements1Cal Values
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements2Cal Values
5.3 Event & fault Records
5.3.1 Introduction
PCS-915 is capable of providing fault and disturbance recording, event recording and present
recording for the protected objects. All the recorded information except for waveform can be
viewed on local LCD or by printing. Waveform must be printed or be extracted using PCS-PC
software and a waveform software.
5.3.2 Event Recording

The device can store up to 1024 abnormality alarm reports and 1024 binary input status changing
reports respectively. All the records are stored in non-volatile memory, and when the available
space is fully occupied, the oldest report is automatically overwritten by the latest one.
Abnormality alarm reports
Abnormality detected during relay self-supervision, secondary circuit abnormality or protection

alarm element will be logged as individual events.
Binary input status changing reports
When binary input status changes, the changed information will be displayed on LCD and logged
as binary input change report at the same time.
5.3.3 Disturbance and Fault Recording

5.3.3.1 Application
Users can use the disturbance recorder to achieve a better understanding of the behavior of the
power network and related primary and secondary device during and after a disturbance.
Analyzing on the recorded data can help to improve the device. This information can also be used
when planning for new installations.
5.3.3.2 Design
Disturbance recorder is consisted of tripping report and fault waveform and it is triggered by fault
detector. The device can store 64 pieces of trip reports and waveforms in non-volatile memory.
When protection operates, the operating information will be displayed on LCD and logged as trip
record at same time, which can be viewed in trip report. Here fault recording includes two kinds of
cases:
1) Only the fault detector element operates.
2) The fault detector element operates along with the operation of protective elements.
1. Trip record capacity and information

Date: 2011-05-24
The device can store 64 pieces of trip reports in non-volatile memory. If a new fault occurs when
the spaces are fully occupied, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest one.
A complete trip record includes the following items:
1) Sequence number
Each operation will be recorded with a sequence number in the report and displayed on LCD
screen.
2) Date and time of fault occurrence
The time resolution is 1 ms using the relay internal clock. Initiating date and time is when a fault
detector picks up. The relative time is the time when protection element operates to send tripping
signal after fault detector picks up.
3) Faulty phase
The faulty phase detected by the operating element is shown in the record report.
4) Operating time
It is the relative time when protection element operates to send tripping signal relative to fault
detector element operating, the operating time of output relay is not included.
5) Protection element
The protection element that issues the tripping command will be shown. If no protection element
operates to trip but only fault detector element operates, the fault report will record the title of fault
detector element.
6) Tripping element
The elements (feeder or bus coupler) tripped are also shown.
2. Fault waveform record capacity and information
MON module of the relay can store 64 pieces of fault waveform oscillogram in non-volatile memory.
If a new fault occurs when 64 fault waveform recorders have been stored, the oldest will be
overwritten by the latest one.
Each fault record consists of all analog and digital quantities related to protection, such as original
current and voltage, differential current, alarm elements, and binary inputs and etc.
Each time recording includes 2-cycle pre-fault waveform, and up to 250 cycles can be recorded.
5.3.4 Present Recording

Present recording is used to record the waveform of present operating device which can be
triggerred manually on LCD of device or remotely through PCS-PC software. Recording content of
present recording is same to that of disturbance recording.
Each time recording includes 2-cycle waveform before triggering, and up to 250 cycles can be
recorded.

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
6 Hardware
Table of Contents
6 Hardware ......................................................................................... 6-a
6.2 Plug-in Module Terminal Definition ............................................................... 6-4
6.2.1 PWR Module (B00: NR1301) .............................................................................................. 6-4
6.2.2 MON Module (B01: NR1101 or NR1102) ............................................................................ 6-6
6.2.3 DSP Module 1 (Protection Calculation) ............................................................................... 6-8
6.2.4 DSP Module 2 (Fault Detector Calculation) ........................................................................ 6-8
6.2.5 NET-DSP Module (GOOSE and SV, Optional) ................................................................... 6-9
6.2.6 Binary Input (BI) Module .................................................................................................... 6-10
6.2.7 Binary Output (BO) Module ............................................................................................... 6-14
6.2.8 Analog Input Module (NR1401) ......................................................................................... 6-18
List of Figures
Figure 6.1-1 Front view of 4U PCS-915 ..................................................................................... 6-2
Figure 6.1-2 Front view of 8U PCS-915 ..................................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6.1-3 Typical rear view of 4U PCS-915 .......................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6.1-4 Typical rear view of 8U PCS-915 .......................................................................... 6-4
Figure 6.2-1 Pin definition of DC power supply module NR1301A ........................................ 6-5
Figure 6.2-2 Rear view of MON modules .................................................................................. 6-7
Figure 6.2-3 Wiring of communication interface ..................................................................... 6-8
Figure 6.2-4 Rear view of DSP modules ................................................................................... 6-9
Figure 6.3-15 View of NET-DSP module .................................................................................... 6-9
Figure 6.2-5 Pin definition of binary input module NR1501A ............................................... 6-10
Figure 6.2-6 Pin definition of binary input module NR1504.................................................. 6-12
Figure 6.2-7 Pin definition of binary input module NR1505.................................................. 6-13
Figure 6.2-8 Pin definition of binary input module NR1502AS............................................. 6-14

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
Figure 6.2-9 Pin definition of BO module NR1521A and 1521B ........................................... 6-15
Figure 6.2-10 Pin definition of BO module NR1547A ............................................................ 6-16
Figure 6.2-11 Pin definition of BO module NR1523A............................................................. 6-17
Figure 6.2-12 Pin definition of BO module NR1548A ............................................................ 6-18
Figure 6.2-13 Typical pin definition of the first AC analog input module............................ 6-19
Table of Tables
Table 6.1-1 PCS-915 module configuration .............................................................................. 6-1

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
PCS-915 adopts 64-bit micro-processor CPU for logic calculations and function management, The
protection calculations are processed by high-speed digital signal processor DSP. System
parameters are sampled at 24 points in every cycle. The sampling data are parallel processed in
each sampling interval to ensure ultrahigh reliability and safety of protection device.
PCS-915 captures current and voltage signal and converts to small signals. These small signals
will be filtered and converted to digital signals by AD converter before being sent to protection
calculation module (DSP module 1) and fault detector calculation module (DSP module 2). When
MON module completes all the protection calculations, the results will be stored in 64-bit CPU on
MON module. DSP module 1 carries out protection logic calculation, tripping output, and MON
module can provide sequence of event (SOE) record, waveform recording, printing,
communication between protection and substation automatic system (SAS) and communication
between HMI and CPU. The operating procedures of fault detector calculation module are similar
to that of protection calculation module, and the only difference is, when fault detector calculation
module decides a fault detector picks up, only the positive power supply of output relay is switched
on.
Table 6.1-1 PCS-915 module configuration
No. Module description
1 Management module (MON module)
2 Protection calculation module (DSP module 1)
3 Fault detector calculation module (DSP module 2)
4 Analog input module ( AI module )
5 Binary input module (BI module)
6 Tripping output module (BO trip module )
7 Signal output module (BO signal module )
8 Power supply module (PWR module)
9 Human machine interface module (HMI module)
GOOSE and SV from merging unit by IEC61850-9-2 (NET-DSP

10
module)
MON module provides management function, completed event record, setting management,
and etc.
DSP modules can provide filtering, sampling, protection calculation and fault detector
calculation.
AI module converts AC current and voltage to low voltage signals by current transformers
and voltage transformers respectively.
BI module provides binary inputs which are inputted via 110V/125V/220V/250V opto-coupler

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
(configurable).
BO module provides all kinds of binary output contacts, including signal output contacts and
tripping output contacts.
PWR module converts DC 250/220/125/110V to different DC voltage levels on request for

various modules of the device
HMI module is comprised of LCD, keypad, LED indicator and test serial ports
NET-DSP module (optional) receives and sends GOOSE messages, sampled values (SV)
from merging unit by IEC61850-9-2 protocol.
Following figures show front view of 4U and 8U size PCS-915 respectively.
Figure 6.1-1 Front view of 4U PCS-915

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
Figure 6.1-2 Front view of 8U PCS-915
Following figures show typical rear view of 4U and 8U size PCS-915 respectively.
Figure 6.1-3 Typical rear view of 4U PCS-915

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
Figure 6.1-4 Typical rear view of 8U PCS-915
6.2 Plug-in Module Terminal Definition
PCS-915 consists of power supply module, MON module, DSP module, analog input module,
binary input module, binary output module, and signal binary output module. The definition and
application of each module and its terminal is introduced as follows.
6.2.1 PWR Module (B00: NR1301)

The power supply module is a DC/DC or AC/DC converter with electrical insulation between input
and output. The power supply module has an input voltage range as described in the chapter of
“Technical Data”. The standard output voltages are +3.3V, +5V, ±12V and +24V DC. The
tolerances of the output voltages are continuously monitored.
The +3.3V DC output provides power supply for the microchip processors, and the +5V DC output
provides power supply for all the electrical elements that need +5V DC power supply in this device.
The ±12V DC output provides power supply for A/D conversion circuits in this device, and the
+24V DC output provides power supply for the static relays of this device.
The use of an external miniature circuit breaker is recommended. The miniature circuit breaker
must be in the on position when the device is in operation and in the off position when the device is
in cold reserve.
A 12-pin connector is fixed on the front of the power supply module. The pin definition of the

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
connector is described as below.
Figure 6.2-1 Pin definition of DC power supply module NR1301A
Pin No. Symbol Description
01 BO_COM1 Common terminal 1.
02 BO_Fail_1 Equipment failure output 1 (01-02, NC)
03 BO_Alm_Abnor_1 Equipment alnormality alarm output 1 (01-03, NO)
04 BO_COM2 Common terminal 2.
05 BO_Fail_2 Equipment failure output 2 (04-05, NC)
06 BO_Alm_Abnor_2 Equipment alnormality alarm output 2 (04-06, NO)
07 OPTO+ Pins 07 and 08 are 24V power supply output for the binary input
module. Pin 07 is 24V+ and Pin 08 is 24V-, the rated output
08 OPTO-
current of this power supply is 200mA.
09 Not used
10 PWR+ Positive input of power supply for the device
11 PWR- Negative input of power supply for the device
12 GND Grounded connection of this device
Note!
The rated voltage of DC power supply module is self-adaptive to 220Vdc and 110Vdc.

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
Power supply in other DC voltage levels or AC voltage power supply need to be specially
ordered. It is important to check if the rated voltage of power supply module is the same as
the voltage of external control power supply before the device is put into service.
Note!
The DC power supply module provides pin 0112 and earth connector for grounding of
device. The pin 0112 shall be connected to earth connector and the earth copper bar of
panel via dedicated grounding wire.
Note!
Effective grounding is the most important measure for device to prevent EMI, so effective
grounding must be ensured before the device is put into operation.
6.2.2 MON Module (B01: NR1101 or NR1102)

The terminals of MON modules and its wiring method are shown in the following figure.
The MON module consists of high-performance built-in processor, FLASH, SRAM, SDRAM,
Ethernet controller and other peripherals. Its can provide management of the complete device,
human machine interface, communication and waveform recording etc.
The MON module uses the internal bus to receive the data from other modules of the device. It
communicates with the LCD module by RS-485 bus. This module is provided with 100BaseT
Ethernet interfaces, RS-485 communication interfaces, PPS/IRIG-B differential time
synchronization interface and RS-232 printing interface.
NR1101E NR1102A NR1102B NR1102C

ETHERNET
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
ETHERNET 1 ETHERNET 1 ETHERNET 1 ETHERNET 1

To SCADA To SCADA To SCADA
ETHERNET 2 ETHERNET 2 ETHERNET 2 ETHERNET 2
To SCADA
RS-485-1A 01
ETHERNET
ETHERNET 3
RS-4851
RS-485-1B 02
RS-485-1
03
GND ETHERNET 4
GND 04
RS-485-2A 05
To SCADA
RS-4852
RS-485-2B 06
RS-485-2
07
GND
GND 08
SYN+ 01 SYN+ 01 SYN+ 01
SYN+ 09
SYN- 02 SYN- 02 SYN- 02

GPS
GPS
GPS
SYN- 10
GPS
To GPS To GPS To GPS To GPS

SHLD 11 SHLD 03 SHLD 03 SHLD 03
GND 12
GND 04 GND 04 GND 04
RXD 13
RXD 05 RXD 05 RXD 05
PRINT
PRINT
TXD 14
PRINT
PRINT
SGND 15
To PRINT TXD 06 To PRINT TXD 06 To PRINT TXD 06 To PRINT
GND 16 SGND 07 SGND 07 SGND 07

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
GPS
GPS
GPS
PRINT
PRINT
PRINT
Figure 6.2-2 Rear view of MON modules
Module ID Memory Interface Physical Layer
2 RJ45 Ethernet
NR1101E 128M DDR Twisted pair wire
2 RS-485
NR1102A 64M DDR 2 RJ45 Ethernet Twisted pair wire
NR1102B 64M DDR 4 RJ45 Ethernet Twisted pair wire
NR1102C 128M DDR 2 RJ45 Ethernet Twisted pair wire
NR1102D 128M DDR 4 RJ45 Ethernet Twisted pair wire
2 RJ45 Ethernet Twisted pair wire

NR1102H 128M DDR
2 FO Ethernet Optical fibre SC
2 RJ45 Ethernet Twisted pair wire

NR1102I 128M DDR
2 FO Ethernet Optical fibre TC

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
Figure 6.2-3 Wiring of communication interface
The correct method of connection is shown in Figure 6.2-3. Generally, the shielded cables with two
pairs of twisted pairs inside shall be applied. One pair of the twisted pairs is used to connect the “+”
and “–” terminals of difference signal; the other is used to connect the signal ground of the
interface, i.e. connect the signal groundings of all the devices to a bus through the twisted pair.
The module reserves a free terminal for all the communication ports; the free terminal has no
connection with any signal of the device; it is used to connect the external shields of the two
cables when connecting multiple devices in series. The external shield of cable shall be grounded
at one of the ends.
6.2.3 DSP Module 1 (Protection Calculation)

The DSP Module 1 consists of high-performance digital signal processor, 16-digit high-accuracy
ADC for synchronous sampling, and other peripherals. The functions of this module include
analog data acquisition, calculation of protection logic and tripping output etc.
6.2.4 DSP Module 2 (Fault Detector Calculation)

The DSP Module 2 consists of high-performance digital signal processor, 16-digit high-accuracy
ADC for synchronous sampling, and other peripherals. The functions of this module include
analog data acquisition, calculation of fault detector elements and providing positive power supply
to output relay.
DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 have the same hardware configuration. The following figure
shows rear views and terminal definitions for different type of DSP modules; the corresponding
module shall be adopted in accordance with concrete situation.

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
NR1156A NR1151D
1 2 3 1 2 3
4 5 6 4 5 6
Figure 6.2-4 Rear view of DSP modules
Module ID Description
NR1156A 36 analog sampling channels, applied for conventional CT/VT.
NR1151D No analog sampling channel, receive signal from motherboard bus
6.2.5 NET-DSP Module (GOOSE and SV, Optional)
Figure 6.2-5 View of NET-DSP module

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
This module consists of high-performance DSP (digital signal processor), up to 8 100Mbit/s

optical-fibre interfaces (LC type) and selectable IRIG-B interface (ST type). It supports GOOSE
and SV by IEC 61850-9-2 protocols and can be used for GOOSE & SV message transmission by
point-to-point connection or via LAN It can receive and send GOOSE messages to intelligent
control device, and receive SV from MU (merging unit). Each interface can be dedicated for
GOOSE or SV message, it can also be shared by GOOSE & SV message. A dedicated GOOSE &
SV configuration will provided in NR company please refer to the specific project configuration
manual.
This module supports IEEE1588 network time protocol, E2E and P2P defined in IEEE1588
protocol can be selected. This module supports Ethernet IEEE802.3 time adjustment message
format, UDP time adjustment message format and GMRP.
6.2.6 Binary Input (BI) Module

NR1501A, NR1502AS, NR1504 and NR1505 modules are four types of standard BI modules. All
the binary inputs can be configured by PCS-PC software according to user requirement, please
refer to chapter 7 about the concrete operation method.
A dedicated binary input configuration will provided in NR company please refer to the specific
project configuration manual.
NR1501A
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1501A and 14 configurable high voltage binary inputs
(per two binary inputs share one common terminal) are equipped with it. The inputted voltage can
be selected to be 110V, 220V, 125V and 250V and the module has opto-coupler power monitor
circuit.
Figure 6.2-6 Pin definition of binary input module NR1501A

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
Pin No. Symbol Description

01 BI_1 Configurable binary input 1.
03 COM1 Common terminal 1 of negative pole of power supply of the module
22 Blank Blank
NR1504
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1504 and 18 configurable high voltage binary inputs
are equipped with it. The inputted voltage can be selected to be 110V, 220V, 125V and 250V and
the module has opto-coupler power monitor circuit.

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
Figure 6.2-7 Pin definition of binary input module NR1504
NR1505
A 30-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1505 and high voltage binary inputs and low voltage
binary inputs are equipped with the NR1505 module at the same time. The module can provide up
to 24 binary inputs and it has opto-coupler power monitor circuit.

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
Figure 6.2-8 Pin definition of binary input module NR1505
NR1502AS
A 30-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1502AS and 25 configurable high voltage binary
inputs are equipped with it. The inputted voltage can be selected to be 110V, 220V, 125V and
250V and the module has opto-coupler power monitor circuit.

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
Figure 6.2-9 Pin definition of binary input module NR1502AS
6.2.7 Binary Output (BO) Module

NR1521A, NR1521B, NR1547A, NR1523A and NR1548A are five types of standard BO modules.
All the binary outputs can be configured by PCS-PC software according to user requirement,
please refer to chapter 7 about the concrete operation method.
It is recommended that the BO contacts controlled by fault detector is used for tripping BO and the
BO contacts not controlled by fault detector is used for signal BO.
A dedicated binary output configuration will provided in NR company please refer to the specific
project configuration manual.
NR1521A and NR1521B
NR1521A can provide 11 normally open (NO) BO contacts, and each output contact will be
controlled by the fault detector.
NR1521B can provide 11 normally open (NO) BO contacts, the first 9 BO contacts will be
controlled by fault detector and the last two BO contacts will not.
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1521A and NR1521B. The pin definition of the
connectors are described as below.

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
Figure 6.2-10 Pin definition of BO module NR1521A and 1521B
NR1547A
NR1547A can provide 15 normally open (NO) BO contacts, and each output contact will be
controlled by the fault detector. A 30-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin
definition of the connector is described as below.

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
Figure 6.2-11 Pin definition of BO module NR1547A
NR1523A
NR1523A can provide 11 signal output contacts and all the contacts are normally open (NO)
contacts. Only the last three contacts ([BO_Signal_9], [BO_Signal_10] and [BO_Signal_11]) are
magnetic latched NO contacts defined as protection tripping signal fixedly. Except for
[BO_Signal_7] and [BO_Signal_8], all the other contacts will be controlled by positive power
supply of fault detector.
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is
described as below.

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
NR1548A
NR1548A is a standard binary output module for signal, which can provide 15 signal output
contacts and all the contacts are normally open (NO) contacts. Only the last seven contacts
([BO_Signal_9] ~ [BO_Signal_15]) are magnetic latched NO contacts defined as protection
tripping signal fixedly. [BO_Signal_1] ~ [BO_Signal_8] will not be controlled by positive power
supply of fault detector and [BO_Signal_9] ~ [BO_Signal_15] will be controlled by positive power
supply of fault detector.
A 30-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is
described as below.

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
6.2.8 Analog Input Module (NR1401)

The NR1401 can provide 12-channel analog signal inputs. A 24-pin connector is fixed on the front
of this module. The pin definition of the connector is described as below (Take the typical definition
of the first analog input module as an example). Please refer to the specific project configuration
manual for the actual pin definition of each analog input module.

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware
Figure 6.2-14 Typical pin definition of the first AC analog input module

Date: 2011-05-24
6 Hardware

Date: 2011-05-24
7 Settings
7 Settings
Table of Contents
7 Settings ........................................................................................... 7-a
7.1 Device Settings ............................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Communication Settings ................................................................................ 7-2
7.3 Label Settings ................................................................................................. 7-4
7.4 Function Links ................................................................................................ 7-4
7.5 GOOSE Links .................................................................................................. 7-6
7.6 System Settings .............................................................................................. 7-6

Date: 2011-05-25
7 Settings
Settings are classified to two kinds, protection settings and common settings. Each protection
element has its independent setting menu which are given detailed description in chapter
“Operation Theory”. In this chapter only common settings are introduced. Common settings
consist of device settings, communication settings, label settings, system settings, function links
and etc.
PCS-915 has ten protection setting groups to coordinate with the different modes of power system
operation. One of these setting groups is assigned to be active. However, common settings are
shared by all protection setting groups.
All current settings in this chapter are secondary current converted from primary current by
reference CT ratio.
7.1 Device Settings
Setting list
No. Item Description Setting Range

Voltage level of binary input for the module that 0:24V, 1:48V
1 Un_BinaryInput_Bx
located in slot No.x 2:110V, 3:220V
Select display primary value or secondary value 0: primary value
2 Opt_DisplayValue
for sampled values 1: secondary value
Select display primary value or secondary value 0: primary value
3 Opt_SettingsValue
for protection settings 1: secondary value
Setting description
1. [Un_BinaryInput_Bx]
The setting is used to set the voltage level of corresponding binary input module. For
high-voltage BI modules, 110V or 220V can be set according to the actual requirement. For
low-voltage BI modules, 24V or 48V can be set according to the actual requirement.
0: 24V
1: 48V
2: 110V
3: 220V
2. [Opt_DisplayValue]
If this setting is not configured, the sampled values are displayed as secondary value by default.
If this setting is set as “0”, the sampled values are displayed as primary value, if this setting is set
as “1”, the sampled values are displayed as secondary value.
The primary voltage is converted into secondary voltage according to rated secondary voltage of
VT (i.e. the system setting [U2n_PP_VT]), if digital sampling mode is adopted, the virtual rated
secondary voltage of VT is 100V by default. The primary current is converted into secondary

Date: 2011-05-25
7 Settings
current according to rated secondary current of reference CT (i.e. the system setting
[I2n_CT_Base]), if digital sampling mode is adopted, the primary current is converted into
secondary current according to the virtual rated secondary current of reference CT.
3. [Opt_SettingsValue]
If this setting is not configured, the protection settings are set and displayed as secondary value
by default. If this setting is set as “0”, the protection settings are set and displayed as primary
value, if this setting is set as “1”, the protection settings are set and displayed as secondary
value.
The primary voltage is converted into secondary voltage according to rated secondary voltage of
VT (i.e. the system setting [U2n_PP_VT]), if digital sampling mode is adopted, the virtual rated
secondary voltage of VT is 100V by default. The primary current is converted into secondary
current according to rated secondary current of reference CT (i.e. the system setting
[I2n_CT_Base]), if digital sampling mode is adopted, the primary current is converted into
secondary current according to the virtual rated secondary current of reference CT.
Access path:
MainMenuSettingsProduct SetupDevice Settings
7.2 Communication Settings
Setting list
No. Setting Item Range Description
1 IP_LAN1 IP address of Ethernet port A
2 Mask_LAN1 Subnet mask of Ethernet port A
3 En_LAN1 0,1 Put Ethernet port A into service
4 IP_LAN2 IP address of Ethernet port B
5 Mask_LAN2 Subnet mask of Ethernet port B
6 En_LAN2 0,1 Put Ethernet port B into service
7 IP_LAN3 IP address of Ethernet port C
8 Mask_LAN3 Subnet mask of Ethernet port C
9 En_LAN3 0,1 Put Ethernet port C into service
10 IP_LAN4 IP address of Ethernet port D
11 Mask_LAN4 Subnet mask of Ethernet port D
12 En_LAN4 0,1 Put Ethernet port D into service
Logic setting of enabling the GOOSE module

13 En_DualNet_GOOSE 0,1
working in dual Ethernet mode
Communication address between the protective

14 Addr_RS485 0~255
device with the SCADA or RTU via RS-485

Date: 2011-05-25
7 Settings
No. Setting Item Range Description
4800,9600,19200,
15 Baud_RS485 Baud rate of rear RS-485 communication port
38400,57600,115200
Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial

16 Protocol_RS485A 0~2
port 1
Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial

17 Protocol_RS485B 0~2
port 2
Logic setting of enabling/disabling blocking

18 En_Maintenance 0/1
direction of communication
4800,9600,
19 Baud_Printer Baud rate of printer port
19200,38400
Logic setting of enabling/disabling automatic

20 En_AutoPrint 0/1
printing function
Logic setting of enabling/disabling high-speed

21 En_FastPrint 0/1
printing function
0: PPS(RS-485)
Logic setting of selecting time synchronization
22 Opt_TimeSyn 1: IRIG-B(RS-485)
mode
2: PPM(DIN)
Setting description
1. [IP_LANX], [Mask_LANX], [En_LANX] (X=1, 2, 3, 4)
These are used for Ethernet communication based on the 103 protocol. When the IEC 61850
protocol is applied, the IP address of Ethernet A will be GOOSE source MAC address.
2. [En_DualNet_GOOSE]
GOOSE module working mode.
0: GOOSE module working in single Ethernet mode
1: GOOSE module working in dual Ethernet mode
3. [Protocol_RS485X] (X=A, B)
Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port X (X=A, B).
0: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
1: DNP3.0 protocol
2: Modbus Protocol
4. [En_Maintenance]
This setting should be set as “1” when the device is in maintenance mode. During this period, the
fault report due to test will not be sent upstream through communication ports, while local display
and printing will not be affected.

Date: 2011-05-25
7 Settings
It is set as “0” when the device is in service. The relation between this setting and binary input
[BI_Maintenance] is “OR”, i.e. as long as one of them is set as “1”, such information as fault report
and waveform will not be sent upstream.
5. [En_AutoPrint]
If automatic print is required for fault report after protection operating, it is set as “1”. Otherwise, it
should be set as “0”.
6. [En_FastPrint]
It is set as “0” for common high definition printing , while it is set as “1” for high-speed printing.
7. [Opt_TimeSyn]
It is set as "0", “1” or “2” for different external clock source.
0: PPS (pulse per second) differential
1: IRIG-B differential
2: PPM (pulse per minute) via external contact
Access Path:
MainMenuSettingsDevice SetupComm Settings
7.3 Label Settings
Setting list
No. Symbol Description
1 Name_Busx Label setting of busbar No.x
2 Name_Bayn Label setting of bay n
These settings are used to definite the label of each bay and busbar. They can be set by 6
characters at most. The label of each bay and busbar will influence the displayed contents of all
reports, settings and meterings that related with each bay and busbar.
Access Path:
MainMenuSettingsDevice SetupLabel Settings
7.4 Function Links
Function Link is a special logic setting which is used to enable protection function. These function
links can be configured through local HMI or remote PC (controlled by the function link
[Link_RmtCtrlLink]).
Each function link is one of the conditions that decide whether the relevant protection function is in
service. If the virtual binary input [Link_RmtCtrlLink] is set as “1”, through SAS or RTU, the

Date: 2011-05-25
7 Settings
function link can be set as “1” or “0”; and it means that the relevant protection function can be in
service or out of service through remote command.
These function links provide a convenient way for the operator to put the function in service or out
of service remotely away from an unattended substation.
Setting list
No. Symbol Remark

1 Link_87B
1: Two busbars are under inter-connected operation mode

2 Link_IntLink_Modex
0: Two busbars are not under inter-connected operation mode
1: Enabling SOTF protection of BCy

3 @BCy.Link_50SOTF
0: Disabling SOTF protection of BCy
1: Enabling SOTF protection of BSz

4 @BSz.Link_50SOTF
0: Disabling SOTF protection of BSz
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent

protection of bay n
5 @Bayn.Link_50/51
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent
protection of bay n
1: Enabling PD protection of bay n

6 @Bayn.Link_62PD
0: Disabling PD protection of bay n
1: Enabling feeder breaker failure protection

7 Link_50BF
0: Disabling feeder breaker failure protection
1: Enforced disconnector position for bay n is enabled. The

disconnector position will be decided by [@Bayn.Link_DSBB1] and
[@Bayn.Link_DSBB2]
8 @Bayn.Link_DS
0: Enforced disconnector position for bay n is disabled. The
disconnector position will be decided by disconnector position binary
input

9 @Bayn.Link_DSBB1

[@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”
10 @Bayn.Link_DSBB2
1: Circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance

11 @Bayn.Link_Maintenance
0: Circuit breaker of bay n is not in maintenance
1: Bay n is put into service.

12 @Bayn.Link_Enable
0: Bay n isout of service.

Date: 2011-05-25
7 Settings
No. Symbol Remark
It is configured when digital sampling mode is adopted.
Enable remote setting modification. Set it as “0” if only local setting

modification is needed. Set it as “1” if local and remote setting
13 Link_RmtChgSetting
modification are both needed.
If it is not configured for a project, its default value is “1”.
Enable remote active setting group modification. Set it as “0” if only

local active setting group modification is needed. Set it as “1” if local
14 Link_RmtChgGrp
and remote active setting group modification are both needed.
Enable remote function links modification. Set it as “0” if only local

function links modification is needed. Set it as “1” if local and remote
15 Link_RmtCtrlLink
function links modification are both needed.
Access Path:
MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links
7.5 GOOSE Links
Setting list
No. Symbol Remark
GOOSE receiving link of bay n, GOOSE binary input signal of bay

1 @Bayn.Link_GS_RL
n can not be received unless it is set as “1”
GOOSE tripping link of bay n, GOOSE tripping output signal of

2 @Bayn.Link_GS_Trp
bay n can not be sent unless it is set as “1”
GOOSE inter-tripping link of bay n, GOOSE inter-tripping output

3 @Bayn.Link_GS_IntTrp
signal of bay n can not be sent unless it is set as “1”
GOOSE breaker failure initiating link of bay n, GOOSE breaker

4 @Bayn.Link_GS_BFI failure initiating output signal of bay n can not be sent unless it is
set as “1”
Access Path:
MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Links
7.6 System Settings
Setting list
No. Item Setting Range Default Setting
1 Active_Grp 1~10 1

Date: 2011-05-25
7 Settings
No. Item Setting Range Default Setting
2 PrimaryEquip_ID 6 characters maximum PCS915
3 U1n_PP_VT 1~1200kV 220kV
4 U2n_PP_VT 1.00~200V 100V
5 I1n_Bayn 0~9999A 1200A
6 I1n_Bayn_CT1 0~9999A 1200A
7 I1n_Bayn_CT2 0~9999A 1200A
8 I1n_Ref 0~9999A 1200A
9 I2n_Ref 1A or 5A 1A
Setting description
1. [Active_Grp]
The number of active setting group, ten setting groups can be configured for busbar differential
protection and breaker failure protection, and only one is active at a time.
2. [PrimaryEquip_ID]
Equipment identity; Equipment can be identified by 6 alphanumeric digits.
3. [U1n_PP_VT]
Rated primary phase-to-phase voltage of VT.
4. [U2n_PP_VT]
Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage of VT.
5. [I1n_Bayn]
Rated primary current of the CT of bay n. It should be set as “0” if the corresponding bay is not
used.
When digital sampling mode is adopted, the setting range will be “-9999A~9999A”, if the polarity
mark of CT of bay n is wrong, it can be corrected by setting [I1n_Bayn] as a negative value.
6. [I1n_Bayn_CT1], [I1n_Bayn_CT2]
If there are two CTs available for bay n (such as a bus coupler with double CTs available),
[I1n_Bayn_CT1] and [I1n_Bayn_CT2] are the rated primary current of the two CTs of bay n. They
should be set as “0” if the corresponding bay is not used.
When digital sampling mode is adopted, the setting range will be “-9999A~9999A”, if the polarity
mark of CT1 or CT2 of bay n is wrong, it can be corrected by setting [I1n_Bayn_CT1] or
[I1n_Bayn_CT2] as a negative value.
7. [I1n_Ref]
Rated primary current of reference CT.

Date: 2011-05-25
7 Settings
This setting is used in case that the rated CT primary currents of each feeder connected to busbar
are different. Among these CTs, the CT with the most applied ratio is taken as the reference CT.
If the maximum CT ratio is two times larger than the minimum CT ratio, in order to ensure
accuracy, the rated primary current of reference CT shall be half of the maximal rated primary
current.
For example, assume only 3 feeders are connected to the busbar.The CT ratios are 600:5 (feeder
02), 600:5 (feeder 03) and 1200:5 (feeder 04). Then, this setting should be set as “600”.
8. [I2n_Ref]
The rated secondary current of reference CT. This setting is used in case that the rated secondary
current of each feeder connected to busbar are different. Among these CTs, the CT with the most
applied ratio is taken as the reference CT.
If digital sampling is adopted, it is the virtual rated secondary current of reference CT. It can be set
according to user’s habit. If the sampled values are displayed as secondary value, the primary
current are converted into secondary current according to it. If all the protection settings are set as
secondary value, users should set all the current settings according to it.
Access path:
MainMenuSettingsSystem Settings

Date: 2011-05-25
Table of Contents
8 Human Machine Interface .............................................................. 8-a
8.1 Human Machine Interface Overview .............................................................. 8-1
8.1.1 Functionality......................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Keypad and Keys................................................................................................................. 8-2
8.1.3 LED Indications.................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.4 Front Communication Port................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.5 Ethernet Port Setup ............................................................................................................. 8-4
8.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree...................................................................... 8-5

8.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 8-5
8.2.2 Measurements ..................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.2.3 Status ................................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.2.4 Records.............................................................................................................................. 8-10
8.2.5 Settings ...............................................................................................................................8-11
8.2.6 Print.................................................................................................................................... 8-12
8.2.7 Local Cmd .......................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.2.8 Information ......................................................................................................................... 8-14
8.2.9 Test .................................................................................................................................... 8-14
8.2.10 Clock ................................................................................................................................ 8-16
8.2.11 Language ......................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.3 Understand LCD Display .............................................................................. 8-16

8.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 8-16
8.3.2 Display during Normal Operation ...................................................................................... 8-16
8.3.3 Display When Tripping....................................................................................................... 8-17
8.3.4 Display under Abnormal condition ..................................................................................... 8-20
8.3.5 Display When Binary Input Status Changes ..................................................................... 8-20

Date: 2011-05-25
8.3.6 Display Device Logs .......................................................................................................... 8-23
8.4 Keypad Operation ......................................................................................... 8-24

8.4.1 View Device Sampled Values ............................................................................................ 8-24
8.4.2 View Status of binary signals ............................................................................................. 8-24
8.4.3 View Device Records......................................................................................................... 8-25
8.4.4 View Device Setting ........................................................................................................... 8-25
8.4.5 Modify Device Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-26
8.4.6 Copy Device Setting .......................................................................................................... 8-29
8.4.7 Print Device Records ......................................................................................................... 8-30
8.4.8 Switch Setting Group ......................................................................................................... 8-31
8.4.9 Delete Records .................................................................................................................. 8-32
8.4.10 Modify Device Clock ........................................................................................................ 8-32
8.4.11 View Module Information ................................................................................................. 8-33
8.4.12 Check Software Version .................................................................................................. 8-33
8.4.13 Communication Test ........................................................................................................ 8-34
8.4.14 Select Language .............................................................................................................. 8-34
List of Figures
Figure 8.1-1 Front panel of 8U chassis ..................................................................................... 8-1
Figure 8.1-2 Keypad mounted on the front panel .................................................................... 8-2
Figure 8.1-3 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel .................................. 8-3
Figure 8.1-4 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102C ................................................... 8-5
Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree of PCS-915 ............................................................................................ 8-7
Figure 8.3-1 LCD display of single line diagram .................................................................... 8-17
Figure 8.3-2 LCD display 1 of trip report ................................................................................ 8-18
Figure 8.3-3 LCD display 2 of trip report and alarm report................................................... 8-19
Figure 8.3-4 LCD display of alarm report................................................................................ 8-20
Figure 8.3-5 Display of binary input change report ............................................................... 8-21
Figure 8.3-6 Display of control report ..................................................................................... 8-23
Figure 8.4-1 Display of inputting password ........................................................................... 8-27

Date: 2011-05-25
Figure 8.4-2 Display 1 of modifying settings.......................................................................... 8-28
Figure 8.4-3 Display 2 of modifying settings.......................................................................... 8-29
Figure 8.4-4 Display of copy settings ..................................................................................... 8-30
Figure 8.4-5 Display of switching setting group .................................................................... 8-31
Figure 8.4-6 Display of deleting report ................................................................................... 8-32
Figure 8.4-7 Display of modifying clock ................................................................................. 8-33
Figure 8.4-8 Display of selecting language ............................................................................ 8-35
List of Tables
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable ................................................................................. 8-4
Table 8.3-1 User Operating event list ...................................................................................... 8-24
PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection 8-c

Date: 2011-05-25
8.1 Human Machine Interface Overview
The human-machine interface is implemented by human-machine interface (HMI) module

which includes the following components:
A 320×240 backlight LCD visible in dim lighting conditions for monitoring status, fault
diagnostics and setting, etc.
LED indicators on the front panel for denoting the status of this protection operation.
A 9-key keypad on the front panel of the device for full access to the device.
5
PCS-915
HEALTHY
MISC ALM BUSBAR PROTECTION
PT/CT ALM
DS ALM
BBP TRIP
BFP TRIP
MISC TRIP
1 3 4
2
Figure 8.1-1 Front panel of 8U chassis
Indication No. Description
1 A 320×240 dots liquid crystal display
2 20 LED indicators
3 A 9-key keypad
4 A multiplex RJ45 port for local communication with a PC
5 LOG, device type and name
8.1.1 Functionality
The HMI module helps to view activated LED or a report display on the LCD after an

Date: 2011-05-25
incident occurred.
Operator are free to browse the data.
Navigate through the menu commands to locate the interested data.
8.1.2 Keypad and Keys

The keypad and keys on the front panel of the device provide convenience to the operator to view
data or change the device’s setting.
The keypad contains nine keys with different function. Figure 8.1-2 shows the keypad and keys.
P
GR
ESC
Figure 8.1-2 Keypad mounted on the front panel
No. Symbol Description
1 , , and , arrow buttons Move between selectable branches of the menu tree.
2 “+”, “-“ Change parameters or setting values.
3 ENT Provide Enter/Execute function.
4 GRP Setting Group selection.
5 ESC Exit the present level in the menu tree.
Note!
Any setting change shall be confirmed by pressing “+”, “3”, “5”, “-“, “ENT” in sequence.
Any report deletion shall be executed by pressing “+”, “-“, “+”, “-“, “ENT” in sequence.
8.1.3 LED Indications

20 LED indicators are available for PCS-915, the 20 LED indicators are, from top to bottom,
operation (HEALTHY), self-supervision (MISC_ALM), others are configurable, please refer to
chapter “Configurable Function” for details.
A brief explanation about some common LED indicators has been made as bellow.
LED Display Description
When the device is out of service or any hardware error is detected

HEALTHY Off
during self-check.

Date: 2011-05-25
LED Display Description
Green Lit when the device is in service and ready for operation.
Off When device in normal operating condition.

MISC_ALM
Yellow Lit when other abnormality occurs.
Off when the device is in normal operating condition.

VT/CT_ALM
Yellow Lit when VT circuit failure or CT circuit failure occurs.

DS_ALM
Yellow Lit when disconnector position is abnormal

BBP_TRIP
Red Lit when busbar differential protection operates to trip.

BFP_TRIP
Red Lit when breaker failure protection operates to trip.

MISC_TRIP Lit when BC protection operates or other protective element operates to
Red
trip BC
Note!
The “HEALTHY” LED can only be turned on by energizing the device again to restart the
relay.
“xx_ALM” LED is turned on when corresponding abnormalities mentioned above occurs

and turned off if the abnormalities are removed except for CT circuit failure alarm
[AlmH_CTS]. [AlmH_CTS] can only be reset when the failure is removed and the device
is rebooted or the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] is energized.
The “xx_TRIP” LED is turned and latched once any protection element operates. The
“xx_TRIP” LED can be turned off by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg].
8.1.4 Front Communication Port

There is a multiplex RJ45 port in the front panel of the device. This port can be used as an RS-232
serial port as well as a twisted-pair Ethernet port. As shown in the following figure, a customized
cable is applied for debugging via this multiplex RJ45 port.
Figure 8.1-3 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel

Date: 2011-05-25
In the above figure and the following table:
P1: To connect the multiplex RJ45 port. An 8-core cable is applied here.
P2: To connect the twisted-pair ethernet port of the computer.
P3: To connect the RS-232 serial port of the computer.
The definition of the 8-core cable in the above figure is introduced in the following table.
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable
Terminal Device side Computer side

Core color Function
No. (Left) (Right)
1 Orange TX+ of the ethernet port P1-1 P2-1
2 Orange & white TX- of the ethernet port P1-2 P2-2
3 Green & white RX+ of the ethernet port P1-3 P2-3
4 Blue TXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-4 P3-2
5 Brown & white RXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-5 P3-3
6 Green RX- for the ethernet port P1-6 P2-6
7 Blue & white The ground connection of the RS-232 port. P1-7 P3-5
8.1.5 Ethernet Port Setup

MON plug-in module is equipped with two or four 100Base-TX Ethernet interface, take NR1102C
as an example, as shown in Figure 8.1-4. Its rear view and the definition of terminals.
The Ethernet port can be used to communication with PC via auxiliary software (PCS-PC) after
connecting the protection device with PC, so as to fulfill on-line function (please refer to the
instruction manual of PCS-PC). At first, the connection between the protection device and PC
must be established. Through setting the IP address and subnet mask of corresponding Ethernet
interface in the menu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm Settings”, it should be ensured that the
protection device and PC are in the same network segment. For example, setting the IP address
and subnet mask of network A. (using network A to connect with PC)
PC: IP address is set as “198.87.96.102”, subnet mask is set as “255.255.255.0”
The IP address and subnet mask of protection device should be [IP_LAN1]= 198.87.96.XXX,
[Mask_LAN1]=255.255.255.0, [En_LAN1]=1. (XXX can be any value from 0 to 255 except 102)
If the logic setting [En_LAN1] is non-available, it means that network A is always enabled.

Date: 2011-05-25
NR1102C
ETHERNET
Network A
Network B
SYN+
SYN-
SGND
GND
RXD
TXD
SGND
GND
Figure 8.1-4 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102C
Note!
If using other Ethernet port, for example, Ethernet B, the logic setting [En_LAN2] must be
set as “1”.
8.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree
8.2.1 Overview
Pressing “▲” at any running interface can return to the main menu. Select different submenu by
“▲” and “▼”. Enter the selected submenu by pressing “ENT” or “►”. Press “◄” and return to the
previous menu. Press “ESC” and exit the main menu directly. For fast return to the command
menu, one command menu will be recorded in the quick menu after its first execution. Up to five
latest menu commands can be recorded in the quick menu. by “first in first out” principle. It is
arranged from top to bottom and in accordance with the execution order of command menus.
Press “▲” to enter the main menu, the interface is shown in the following diagram:

Date: 2011-05-25
If the protective device is powered for the first time, there is no recorded shortcut menu. Press “▲”
to enter the main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:

Date: 2011-05-25
Main Menu
Measurements Settings Local Cmd

Device Setup
Measurements1 Reset Target
Device Settings Trig Oscillograph
Measured Values
Comm Settings Download
Phase Angle
Label Settings Clear Counter GOOSE
Cal Values
Clear Counter SV
Logic Links
Measurements2 Confirm Disconnector
Function Links
Measured Values GOOSE Links
Information
Phase Angle
System Settings
Cal Values Version Info
Prot Settings
Board Info
BBP Settings
Status BC BFP Settings
Test
Fdr BFP Settings
Inputs Device Test
SOTF Settings
GOOSE Inputs OC Settings Prot Elements
PD Settings
GOOSE Inputs 1 All Test
GOOSE Inputs 2 Copy Settings Select Test
GOOSE Inputs 3 Superv Events
Prot Inputs Print All Test
Device Info Select Test
Prot Bay Inputs 1
Prot Bay Inputs 2 Settings IO Events
Prot Bay Inputs 3 Device Setup All Test
Prot Function Inputs Select Test
Device Settings
FD Inputs Communication Settings Internal Signal
Label Settings
FD Bay Inputs 1 Zone Cal BI
Logic Links Bay Info
FD Bay Inputs 2
FD Bay Inputs 3 Function Links Bay
FD Function Inputs GOOSE Links
……
System Settings Bay01
Misc Inputs
Prot Settings Bus2
Superv State BBP Settings Bus1
Prot Superv BC BFP Settings Disturb Record Items

Fdr BFP Settings GOOSE Comm Counter
Prot Bay Superv 1 SOTF Settings SV Comm Counter
Prot Bay Superv 2 OC Settings
Prot Bay Superv 3
PD Settings
Prot Misc Superv Clock
All Settings
FD Superv Latest Modified
Language
FD Bay Superv 1 Disturb Records
FD Bay Superv 2 Superv Events
FD Bay Superv 3 IO Events
FD Misc Superv Device Status
Waveforms
Records Diff Wave
Bay Wave 1
Disturb Records
Bay Wave 2
Superv Events
Bay Wave 3
IO Events
Bay Wave 4
Device Logs
Bay Wave 5
Clear Records
IEC103 Info
Cancel Print
Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree of PCS-915
Under the main interface, press “▲” to enter the main menu, and select submenu by pressing “▲”,
“▼” and “ENT”. The command menu adopts a tree shaped content structure. The above diagram

Date: 2011-05-25
provides the integral structure and all the submenus under menu tree of the protection device.
This is the maximized menu of PCS-915, for a specific project, if some function is not available,
the corresponding submenu will hidden.
8.2.2 Measurements
This menu is used to display real time AC voltage and AC current sampled values of the protective
device. These data can help users to acquaint the operation condition of the protective device.
This menu comprises following submenus. Please refer to Section 5.2 about the details of
sampled values.
No. Item Description
1 Measurements1 Display sampled values on protection DSP module.
2 Measurements2 Display sampled values on fault detector DSP module.
8.2.2.1 Measurements1
The submenu “Measurements1” has following submenus.
1 Measured Values Display measured analog values on protection DSP module.
2 Phase Angle Display phase angles on protection DSP module.
3 Cal Values Display measured values for debugging on protection DSP module.
8.2.2.2 Measurements2
The submenu “Measurements2” has following lower submenus.
1 Measured Values Display measured analog values on fault detector DSP module.
2 Phase Angle Display phase angles on fault detector DSP module.
3 Cal Values Display measured values for debugging on fault detector DSP module.
8.2.3 Status
This menu is used to display real time binary inputs and alarm signals of the protective device.
These data can help users to acquaint the operation condition of the protective device. This menu
comprises following submenus. Please refer to Section 8.3.5 about the details of binary inputs and
Section 4.5 about the details of alarm signals.
1 Inputs Display the status of binary inputs
2 Superv State Display the status of alarm signals
8.2.3.1 Inputs
The submenu “Inputs” has following submenus.

Date: 2011-05-25
1 GOOSE Inputs Display the status of GOOSE binary inputs
Display the status of binary inputs that used for calculation of protection DSP
2 Prot Inputs
module
Display the status of binary inputs that used for calculation of fault detector
3 FD Inputs
DSP module
Display the status of other binary inputs (such as time synchronizing binary
4 Misc Inputs input, printing binary input, maintenance binary input, resetting binary input
and opto binary inputs).
(1) The submenu “GOOSE Inputs” includes the following command menus.
1 GOOSE Inputs 1 Display the status of GOOSE binary inputs about position of disconnector
Display the status of pole disagreement GOOSE binary inputs, closing

2 GOOSE Inputs 2
GOOSE binary inputs and GOOSE binary inputs about position of breaker
Display the status of GOOSE binary inputs related to breaker failure

3 GOOSE Inputs 3
protection
(2) The submenu “Prot Inputs” includes the following command menus.
Display the status of binary inputs about position of disconnector on

1 Prot Bay Inputs 1
protection DSP module.
Display the status of binary inputs related to breaker failure protection on

2 Prot Bay Inputs 2
Display the status of pole disagreement binary inputs, closing binary inputs
3 Prot Bay Inputs 3
and binary inputs about position of breaker on protection DSP module.
Display the status of function enabling binary inputs on protection DSP

4 Prot Function Inputs
module.
(3) The submenu “FD Inputs” includes the following command menus.
Display the status of binary inputs about position of disconnector on fault

1 FD Bay Inputs 1
detector DSP module.
Display the status of binary inputs related to breaker failure protection on fault
2 FD Bay Inputs 2
detector DSP module.
Display the status of pole disagreement binary inputs, closing binary inputs
3 FD Bay Inputs 3
and binary inputs about position of breaker on fault detector DSP module.

Date: 2011-05-25
Display the status of function enabling binary inputs on fault detector DSP
4 FD Function Inputs
module.
8.2.3.2 Superv State
The submenu “Superv State” has following submenus.
1 Prot Superv Display the status of self-supervision signals on protection DSP module
2 FD Superv Display the status of self-supervision signals on fault detector DSP module
The submenu “Prot Superv” includes the following command menus.
Display the status of self-supervision signals about position of disconnector

1 Prot Bay Superv 1
on protection DSP module.
Display the status of self-supervision signals about binary inputs related to

breaker failure protection and persisting pick up signals of breaker failure
2 Prot Bay Superv 2
protection, overcurrent protection, end zone fault protection and
switch-onto-fault protection on protection DSP module.
Display the status of self-supervision signals about pole disagreement binary

3 Prot Bay Superv 3 inputs, closing binary inputs and binary inputs about position of breaker on
Display the status of other self-supervision signals on protection DSP

5 Prot Misc Superv
module.
The submenu “FD Superv” includes the following command menus.
Display the status of self-supervision signals about position of disconnector

1 FD Bay Superv 1
on fault detector DSP module.
Display the status of self-supervision signals about binary inputs related to

breaker failure protection and persisting pick up signals of breaker failure
2 FD Bay Superv 2
protection, overcurrent protection, end zone fault protection and
switch-onto-fault protection on fault detector DSP module.
Display the status of self-supervision signals about pole disagreement binary

3 FD Bay Superv 3 inputs, closing binary inputs and binary inputs about position of breaker on
fault detector DSP module.
Display the status of other self-supervision signals on fault detector DSP

5 FD Misc Superv
module.
8.2.4 Records
This menu displays protection tripping report, self-supervision report, binary input change report

Date: 2011-05-25
and control report. The protective device can store 1024 pieces of recorders for each kind of report
in non-volatile memory.
1 Disturb Records View the tripping report
2 Superv Events View the self-supervision report
3 IO Events View the binary input change report
4 Device Logs View the control report
5 Clear Records Clear all the device records
8.2.5 Settings
This submenu is used to browse, modify and set all settings including device settings,
communication parameters, label settings, function links, GOOSE links, system settings and
protection settings.
This menu includes the command menus and submenus as follows:
The submenu “Settings” includes the following command menus.
No. Item Function description
1 Device Setup Set the settings related to device setup
2 Logic Links Includes function links and GOOSE links
3 System Settings Set the system settings
4 Prot Settings Set the protection settings
5 Copy Settings To copy settings from one group to another group
8.2.5.1 Device Setup
The submenu “Device Setup” includes the following command menus.
1 Device Settings Set the device settings
2 Comm Settings Set the communication settings.
3 Label Settings Set the label settings of each protected element.
8.2.5.2 Logic Links
The submenu “Logic Links” includes the following command menus.
1 Function Links Set the function links.
2 GOOSE Links Set the GOOSE links.
8.2.5.3 Prot Settings
The submenu “Prot Settings” includes the following command menus.

Date: 2011-05-25
1 BBP Settings Set the settings about busbar differential protection
2 BC BFP Settings Set the settings about BC/BS breaker failure protection
3 Fdr BFP Settings Set the settings about feeder breaker failure protection
4 SOTF Settings Set the settings about switch-onto-fault protection
5 OC Settings Set the settings about overcurrent protection
6 PD Settings Set the settings about pole disagreement protection
8.2.6 Print
This menu is used to print the self-supervision report, binary input change report, waveform and
the information related with settings, fault report and 103 protocol, and so on.
This menu includes the command menus and submenus as follows:
1 Device Info Print the description information of protective device.
Print settings, includes device settings, communication parameters, label

settings, function links, GOOSE links, system settings, and protection
2 Settings
settings. It can print by different classifications as well as printing all settings
of the device. Besides, it can also print out the latest modified setting item.
3 Disturb Records Print trip reports.
4 Superv Events Print self-check alarm and device operation abnormal alarm reports.
5 IO Events Print status change of binary signal.
6 Device Status Print all the values measured by the device
7 Waveforms Print recorded waveforms.
Print 103 Protocol information, including function type (FUN), information

8 IEC103 Info serial number (INF), general classification service group number, and
channel number (ACC).
9 Cancel Print Cancel the print command
8.2.6.1 Settings
The submenu “Settings” includes the following command menus.
1 Device Setup Print the settings related to product setup
2 Logic Links Print the function links or GOOSE links
3 System Settings Print the system settings.
4 Prot Settings Print the protection settings
Print the content of all settings including device setups, system settings,
5 All Settings
protection settings and logic links.

Date: 2011-05-25
6 Latest Modified Print the content of the latest modified setting
(1) The submenu “Device Setup” includes the following command menus.
1 Device Settings Print the device settings.
2 Comm Settings Print the communication settings.
3 Label Settings Print the label settings of protective device.
(2) The submenu “Prot Settings” includes the following command menus.
1 BBP Settings Print the settings about busbar differential protection
2 BC BFP Settings Print the settings about BC/BS breaker failure protection
3 Fdr BFP Settings Print the settings about feeder breaker failure protection
4 SOTF Settings Print the settings about switch-onto-fault protection
5 OC Settings Print the settings about overcurrent protection
6 PD Settings Print the settings about pole disagreement protection
8.2.6.2 Waveforms
The submenu “Waveforms” has following submenus.
1 Diff Wave To print differential current waveforms
2 Bay Wave 1 To print current waveforms of Bay 01~05
8.2.7 Local Cmd

This menu is used to reset the latched tripping relay, protection device signal lamp and LCD
display. It can record the currently acquired waveform of the protection device under normal
condition for printing and uploading to substation automatic system (SAS). Besides, it can send
out the request of program download and clear the communication statistic information about
GOOSE, SV and optical fibre.
This menu includes the following command menus.
1 Reset Target Reset the local signal, the signal indicator lamp and the LCD display.

Date: 2011-05-25
2 Trig Oscillograph Trigger waveform recording.
3 Download Send out the download request.
4 Clear Counter GOOSE Clear the communication statistic information about GOOSE
5 Clear Counter SV Clear the communication statistic information about SV
6 Confirm Disconnector Confirm the disconnector position
8.2.8 Information
In this menu the LCD displays current working state of each intelligent module and software
information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module.
Display software information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module,
1 Version Info which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes and
management sequence number.
2 Board Info Monitor the current working state of each intelligent module.
8.2.9 Test
This menu is used for developers to debug the program and for engineers to maintain the device.
It can be used to check module information and item fault message, and fulfill the communication
test function. It’s also used to generate all kinds of report or event to transmit to the SAS without
any external input, so as to debug the communication on site.
Automatically generate all kinds of message to transmit to the backstage,

1 Device Test including tripping, self-check and binary signal transmission. It can realize
the transmission of messages of different classification.
Display the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit and
2 Internal Signal
relevant information about each protected bay
3 Disturb Record Items Check the fault report one by one.
4 GOOSE Comm Counter Display the communication statistic information of GOOSE
5 SV Comm Counter Display the communication statistic information of SV
8.2.9.1 Device Test
The submenu “Device Test” has following submenus.
View the relevant information about tripping report (only used for debugging
1 Prot Elements
persons)

Date: 2011-05-25
View the relevant information about alarm report (only used for debugging
2 Superv Events
persons)
View the relevant information about binary input change report (only used
3 IO Events
for debugging persons)
The submenu “Prot Elements” includes the following command menus.
1 All Test Ordinal test of all protection elements
2 Select Test Selective test of corresponding classification
The submenu “Superv Events” includes the following command menus.
1 All Test Ordinal test of all self-supervisions
The submenu “IO Events” includes the following command menus.
1 All Test Ordinal test of change of all binary inputs
8.2.9.2 Internal Signal
The submenu “Internal Signal” has following submenus.
1 Zone Cal BI Display the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit
Display the relevant information about each protected bay. Please refer to
2 Bay Info Section 5.2 about the details of sampled values, Section 8.3.5 about the
details of binary inputs and Section 4.5 about the details of alarm signals.
The submenu “Zone Cal BI” will display the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential
circuit. It can help users to know the current composition of differential current. If the value of the
calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit is “1”, it means that the current of bay n
is included in differential current.
Item Description
VBI_CZ_@Bayn Calculated binary input of bay n for check zone differential circuit
Calculated binary input of bay n for discriminating zone differential circuit of

VBI_DZ_@BBx_@Bayn
BBx
The submenu “Bay Info” has following submenus.

Date: 2011-05-25
1 Bus1 Display the relevant information about BB No. 1
2 Bus2 Dis play the relevant information about BB No. 2
3 Bay01 Display the relevant information about bay 01
4 …… ……
5 Bayn Display the relevant information about bay n
8.2.10 Clock
The time of internal clock can be viewed in “Clock” option. The time is displayed in the form
YY-MM-DD and hh:mm:ss. All values are presented with digits and can be modified.
8.2.11 Language
This menu is mainly used for set LCD display language.
8.3 Understand LCD Display
8.3.1 Overview
There are five kinds of LCD display, system topology if the protective device is under the normal
condition, tripping reports, alarm reports, binary input changing reports and control reports.
Tripping reports and alarm reports will be continuously displayed until operators energizing the
resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg]. User can press “ENT” and “ESC” at the same time to switch
view of trip reports, alarm reports and the SLD display. Binary change reports will be displayed
before returning to the previous display interface automatically. Control reports will not pop up and
can only be viewed by navigating the corresponding menu.
8.3.2 Display during Normal Operation

After the protection device is powered and enters initiating interface, it takes 30 seconds to
complete the initialization of protection device. During the initialization, the “HEALTHY” indicator of
the protection device goes out.
Under normal condition, the LCD will display the interface shown as Figure 8.3-1. The LCD
displays in white color backlight which is activated if there is any keyboard operation, and is
extinguished automatically after 60 seconds without any operation.

Date: 2011-05-25
Data and time of equipment clock
Communication address Addr:098 2010-09-28 10:10:00 Group:01 Active group number
Description of BB No.1
Fdr01 Fdr03 Fdr05 Fdr07 Description of each feeder
Description of BC BC
0.01A 0.01A 0.00A 0.00A Phase-A current of each feeder
Phase-A current of BC 0.01A
Disconnector (Closed)
BB1
Bus Coupler
means BC is open BB2
Disconnector (Open)
means BC is closed
0.01A 0.01A 0.00A 0.01A
Fdr02 Fdr04 Fdr06 Fdr08
Description of BB No.2
Three-phase voltage of BB No.1 bus1_Volt: 57.70V 57.70V 57.70V
Three-phase voltage of BB No.2 bus2_Volt: 57.70V 57.70V 57.70V
Three-phase differential current DI: 0.00A 0.00A 0.01A
Figure 8.3-1 LCD display of single line diagram
The middle part of Figure 8.3-1 displays the single line diagram of busbar with feeders whose CT
correction coefficient is not zero. The description of each feeder (at most 6 digits or characters,
please refer to Section 7.3) and feeder current is shown by the side of the corresponding feeder.
Three-phase voltage of BB1 and BB2 (bus1_Volt and bus2_Volt), check zone differential current
(DI), discriminating zone differential current of BB1 and BB2 (bus1_DI and bus2_DI) are shown
under the single line diagram.
If the protective device receives the IRIG-B signal for time synchronization and can correctly
decode it, “S” will be displayed on the top left corner of LCD.
If all feeders can not displayed in one page, the single line diagram will move automatically and
circularly from right to left if no key is pressed, and will move to left quickly by pressing key “◄”
continuously, move to right quickly by pressing key “►” continuously.
The displayed content contains: the realtime date and time of the protection device (with a format
of yy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), realtime valid setting group number, three-phase current and voltage
sampling values on each side and differential current etc.
8.3.3 Display When Tripping

This protection device can store 64 fault reports and 64 fault waveforms. When there is protection
element operating, the LCD will automatically display the latest fault report. PCS-915M can
provide two different LCD display interfaces based on the availability of self-check report.
As shown in Figure 8.3-2, if the self-check report is not provided, the display interface will only
show the fault report.

Date: 2011-05-25
Figure 8.3-2 LCD display 1 of trip report
NO.005 2010-04-28 07:10:00:200 Trip: shows the SOE number, the time when fault detector
picks up (the format is year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond) and the title of the
report.
0000ms Pkp_FD shows the fault detector of protection element and the
operation time of fault detector is fixed at 0ms.
0006ms A 87B.Op_TrpBB1_DPFC
Trp_BC Trp_Fdr02
Trp_Fdr03 Trp_Fdr06 shows the relative operation time of protection element,
protection elements and trip elements.
0006ms 87B.Op_TrpBC shows the relative operation time and operation element
of protection element
Id_max 1.05A shows the maximum differential current
If the fault report and the self-check alarm report occur simultaneously, as shown in Figure 8.3-2,
the upper half part on the screen is fault report, and the lower half part is self-check report. The
fault report inlcudes fault report number, fault name, generating time of fault report (with a format
of year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond), protection element and tripping element.
If there is protection element, the relative time will be displayed on the basis of fault detector
element and fault phase. If the upper half part on the screen is not big enough to list all the
protection elements and tripping elements, the report will be automatically displayed in a cyclye
without pressing any key on the front panel.
The displayed content of the lower half part is the alarm element. If the alarm element is more than
one, all the alarm elements will be displayed in a cycle.

Date: 2011-05-25
NO.005 2010-04-28 07:10:00:200 Trip
0000ms Pkp_FD
0006ms A 87B.Op_TrpBB1_DPFC
Trp_BC Trp_Fdr02
Trp_Fdr03 Trp_Fdr06
0006ms 87B.Op_TrpBC
Id_max 1.05A
Alarm Info
Alm_Maintenance
Figure 8.3-3 LCD display 2 of trip report and alarm report
All the trip information are listed in the following tables:
1. Operation elements
3 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_Bias Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
4 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
7 50DZ.Op_@Bayn End zone fault protection of bay n operates
EFP or BFP of bay n operates to initiate transfer trip to remote circuit

8 Op_TT_@Bayn
breaker
9 50SOTF.Op_Trp@BCy SOTF protection of BCy operates
10 50SOTF.Op_Trp@BSz SOTF protection of BSz operates
11 50/51P.Op_Trp@Bayn phase overcurrent protection of bay n operates
12 50/51G.Op_Trp@Bayn ground overcurrent protection of bay n operates
13 62PD.Op_Trp@Bayn PD protection of bay n operates
14 @BCy.50BF.Op_TrpBB BCy BFP operates to trip busbar
15 @BSz.50BF.Op_TrpBB BSz BFP operates to trip busbar
16 50BF.Op_ReTrp_@Bayn BFP of bay n operates to re-trip the breaker
17 50BF.Op_Trp@BCy BFP operates to trip BCy breaker
18 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx BFP operates to trip BBx

Date: 2011-05-25
19 Pkp_FD Fault detector picks up
20 ManTrigDFR Oscillography function is triggered manually.
2. Trip elements
1 Trp_@Bayn Trip circuit breaker of bay n
Transfer tripping remote circuit breaker of corresponding feeder bay or

2 TT_@Bayn
inter-tripping breakers of other sides of corresponding main transformer bay
8.3.4 Display under Abnormal condition

This protection device can store 1024 self-check reports. During the running of protection device,
the self-check report of hardware errors or system running abnormity will be displayed
immediately.
Superv Events NO.26

2010-04-29 09:18:47:500ms
Alm_Maintenance 0 1
Figure 8.3-4 LCD display of alarm report
Superv Events shows the title of the report
Alm_Maintenance shows the content of abnormality alarm
If view the corresponding alarm report from the submenu “Superv Events” under the menu of
“Records”, the SOE number and the real time of the report will be indicated in the alarm report.
All the alarm elements have been listed in Chapter “Supervision”.
8.3.5 Display When Binary Input Status Changes

If the status of any binary changes or any logic link is modified, as shown in Figure 8.3-5, a new
report on the state changes will be automatically displayed on LCD. PCS-915 can store 1024

Date: 2011-05-25
binary input change reports. During the running of the device, the signals will be displayed at the
moment when the its state changes.
IO Events NO.26
2010-04-29 09:18:47:500ms
EBI_BBP 0 1
Figure 8.3-5 Display of binary input change report
IO Events NO.26 shows the number and the title of the report
2010-04-29 09:18:47:500 shows the date and time of the report occurred, the format is
year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond
EBI_BBP 0->1 shows the state change of binary input, including the binary input
name and the original state and final state
All the binary inputs are listed in the following tables:
1 BI_Pulse_GPS Binary input of time synchronization pulse
2 BI_Print Binary input of triggering printing
Binary input of blocking communication between equipment and substation

3 BI_Maintenance
automatic system (SAS) or remote terminal unit (RTU).
4 BI_RstTarg Binary input of resetting signal of protective equipment.
5 BI_Blk_BBP External binary input of blocking BBP
6 BI_Cls_@Bayn Binary input of closing circuit breaker of bay n
7 BI_PD_@Bayn Binary input indicating breaker of bay n is in pole disagreement status

Date: 2011-05-25
12 BI_BFI_@Bayn Binary input for initiating BFP of three phases of bay n
13 BI_A_BFI_@Bayn Binary input for initiating BFP of phase A of bay n
14 BI_B_BFI_@Bayn Binary input for initiating BFP of phase B of bay n
15 BI_C_BFI_@Bayn Binary input for initiating BFP of phase C of bay n
Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element of breaker failure

16 BI_Rls_VCE_BFP_@Bayn
protection of bay n
17 BI_89a_@BBx_@Bayn Normally open auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of bay n
18 BI_89b_@BBx_@Bayn Normally closed auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of bay n
19 BI_52a_@Bayn Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n
20 BI_52b_@Bayn Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n
21 BI_52a_Pha_@Bayn Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n
22 BI_52a_Phb_@Bayn Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n
23 BI_52a_Phc_@Bayn Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n
24 BI_52b_Pha_@Bayn Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n
25 BI_52b_Phb_@Bayn Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n
26 BI_52b_Phc_@Bayn Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n
27 BI_89a_@BBx_BT Normally open auxiliary contact of substituting disconnector of BBx
28 BI_ConfirmDS Disconnector position confirm binary input
Binary input of enabling BBP (it is configured when the function setting
29 EBI_BBP “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is set as “Disable”), if it is not
Binary input of disabling BBP (it is configured when the function setting
30 EBI_Out_BBP “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is set as “Enable”), if it is not
Binary input indicating that two busbars are under the inter-connected
31 EBI_IntLink_Modex
operation mode, if it is not configured, its default value is “0”
Binary input of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured when the
32 EBI_SOTF_BC function setting “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is set as
Binary input of disabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured when the
33 EBI_Out_SOTF_BC function setting “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is set as
Binary input of enabling overcurrent protection (it is configured when the

34 EBI_OC function setting “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is set as
Binary input of disabling overcurrent protection (it is configured when the

35 EBI_Out_OC function setting “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is set as

Date: 2011-05-25
Binary input of enabling PD protection (it is configured when the function

36 EBI_PD setting “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is set as “Disable”), if it is
not configured, its default value is “1”
Binary input of disabling PD protection (it is configured when the function

37 EBI_Out_PD setting “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is set as “Enable”), if it is
Binary input of enabling feeder BFP (it is configured when the function
38 EBI_BFP setting “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is set as “Disable”), if it is
Binary input of disabling feeder BFP (it is configured when the function
39 EBI_Out_BFP setting “Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs” is set as “Enable”), if it is
Binary input indicating BC/BS breaker is used to substitute one of feeder

40 EBI_BC_As_BT_Mode
breakers
Reverse the polarity mark of BC/BS CT when BC/BS breaker is used to

41 EBI_NegPolar_CT_BT
substitute one of feeder breakers
8.3.6 Display Device Logs

This protection device can store 1024 pieces of the control report (i.e. user operating reports).
During the running of the protection device, the running report will be displayed after any operation
is conducted.
Device Logs NO.4

2010-04-29 10:18:47:569ms
Settings_Chgd
Figure 8.3-6 Display of control report
Device Logs NO. 4 shows the title and the number of the report
2010-04-29 10:18:47:569 shows the date and the time when the report is created, the format

Date: 2011-05-25
is year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond
Settings_Chgd shows the state content of the user operation report.
User operating information listed below may be displayed.
Table 8.3-1 User Operating event list
No. Message Description
1 Reboot The protective device has been reboot.
2 Reset_Target The protective device has been reset.
3 Settings_Chgd The settings of protective device have been changed.
4 ActiveGrp_Chgd Active setting group has been changed.
5 Report_Cleared All reports have been deleted. (User operating event can not be deleted)
6 Waveform_Cleared All waveforms have been deleted.
7 SubProcess_Exit A subprocess has exited.
8 Fail_Setting_OvRange Any setting value is out of setting scope.
9 Alm_CommTest The relay is in test mode.
Mismatch between the configuration of plug-in boards and the designing

10 Fail_BoardConfig
drawing of an applied-specific project.
11 Pkp_FD Fault detector picks up.
12 ManTrigDFR Oscillography function is triggered manually.
8.4 Keypad Operation
8.4.1 View Device Sampled Values

The operation is as follows:
1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Measurements” menu, and then
press the “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press
“ENT” to enter submenu.
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one
display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).
5. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.
6. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Measurements” menu).
8.4.2 View Status of binary signals


Date: 2011-05-25
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Status” menu, and then press the
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press
“ENT” to enter submenu.
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one
display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).
6. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Status” menu).
8.4.3 View Device Records

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Records” menu, and then press the
key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
key “ENT” to enter the submenu.
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to page up/down.
5. Press the key “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record.
7. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Records” menu).
For the fault report, view the single item fault report by the command menu “Disturb Record
Items”, and the item fault report produces with change of any item of fault report. The item fault
report can save up to 1024 events.
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Test” menu, and then press the key
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Disturb Record
Items”, and then press the “ENT” to enter the menu.
4. Press the key “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record.
5. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Test” menu).
8.4.4 View Device Setting

Follow the steps below to view the device settings:

Date: 2011-05-25
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press
“ENT” to enter the menu.
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor.
5. Press the key “+” or “-” to page up/down.
7. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings”).
Note!
If the displayed information exceeds 14 lines, the scroll bar will appear on the right side of
the LCD to indicate the quantity of all displayed information of the command menu and the
relative location of information where the current cursor points at.
8.4.5 Modify Device Setting

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor.
5. Press the key “+” or “-” to page up/down.
7. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings” ).
8. Select the command menu “Device Settings”, “Label Settings”, or “Comm

Settings”, users need to enter the submenu “Device Setup” firstly. Select the
command menu “BBP Settings”, “BC BFP Settings”, “Fdr BFP Settings”, “SOTF
Settings”, “OC Settings” or “PD Settings”, users need to enter the submenu “Prot
Settings” firstly. Select the command menu “Function Links” or “GOOSE Links”,
users need to enter the submenu “Logic Links” firstly.
Following takes modification of system settings as an example.

Date: 2011-05-25
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “System
Settings”, and then press “ENT” to enter the menu.
4. Move the cursor to the setting item to be modified, and then press the key “ENT”.
5. Press the key “＋” or “－” to modify the value (if the modified value is multi-bit, press
the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor to the digit bit, and then press the “＋” or “－” to
modify the value), press the key “ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the
displayed interface of the command menu “System Settings”. Press the key “ENT” to
automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command
menu “System Settings”).
6. Move the cursor to continue modifying other setting items. After all setting values are
modified, press the key “◄”, “►” or “ESC”, and the LCD will display “Save or Not?”.
Directly press the “ESC” or press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select the
“Cancel”, and then press the key “ENT” to automatically exit this menu (returning to
the displayed interface of the command menu “System Settings”).
7. Press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select “No” and press the key “ENT”, all
modified setting item will restore to its original value, exit this menu (returning to the
menu “Settings”).
8. Press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor to select “Yes”, and then press the key
“ENT”, the LCD will display password input interface.
Figure 8.4-1 Display of inputting password
9. Input a 4-bit password (“＋”, “◄”, “▲” or “－”). If the password is incorrect, continue
inputting it, then press “ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to the
displayed interface of the command menu “System Settings”. If the password is
correct, LCD will display “Save Settings…”, and then exit this menu (returning to the
displayed interface of the command menu “System Settings”). The device setting
modification is completed.

Date: 2011-05-25
Note!
The above modification instructions are available for all setting items.
Note!
After modifying the settings in menu “System Settings” or “Prot Settings”, the
“HEALTHY” indicator of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will
automatically restart and re-check the settings. The device will be blocked until the check
process is finished. If selecting the command menu of protection element such as “BBP
Settings”, the LCD will display the following interface:
Figure 8.4-2 Display 1 of modifying settings
Then move the cursor to the modified value and press “ENT” to enter. For example, if the setting
[87B.I_Bias] need to be modified, press the “ENT” to enter and the LCD will display the interface
shown in Figure 8.4-3. Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value and then press the “ENT” to enter.

Date: 2011-05-25
Figure 8.4-3 Display 2 of modifying settings
10. If selecting the other menus, move the cursor to the setting to be modified, and then
press the “ENT”.
8.4.6 Copy Device Setting

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu;
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press the
key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Copy Settings”,
and then press the key “ENT” to enter the menu. The following display will be shown on
LCD.

Date: 2011-05-25
Figure 8.4-4 Display of copy settings
Press the key “＋” or “－” to modify the value. Press the key “ESC”, and return to the
menu “Settings”. Press the “ENT”, the LCD will display the interface for password input,
if the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, press the key “ESC” to exit the
password input interface and return to the menu “Settings”. If the password is correct,
the LCD will display “Copy Settings Success!”, and exit this menu (returning to the menu
“Settings”).
8.4.7 Print Device Records

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Print” menu, and then press the
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
Selecting the “Disturb Records”, and then
Press the “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key “ENT”,
the LCD will display “Start Printing... ”, and then automatically exit this menu
(returning to the menu “Print”). If the printer doesn’t complete its current print task
and re-start it for printing, the LCD will display “Printer Busy…”. Press the key “ESC”
to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”).
Selecting the command menu “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, and then press the
key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor. Press the “＋” or “－” to select the starting and
ending numbers of printing message. After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will
display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the

Date: 2011-05-25
menu “Print”). Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”).
4. If selecting the command menu “IEC103 Info”, “Device Status” or “Device Info”, press
the key “ENT”, the LCD will display “Start printing..”, and then automatically exit this menu
(returning to the menu “Print”).
5. If selecting the “Settings”, press “ENT” or “►” to enter the submenu.
6. After entering the submenu “Settings”, press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor, and
then press the key “ENT” to print the corresponding default value. To select items to print:
Press the key “＋” or “－” to select the setting group to print. After pressing the key “ENT”,
the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to
the menu “Settings”). Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu
“Settings”).
7. After entering the submenu “Waveforms”, press the “＋” or “－” to select the printed
waveform and press “ENT” to enter. With waveform data existing:
Press the key “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key “ENT”,
the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to
the menu “Waveforms”). If the printer does not complete its current print task and
re-start it for printing, and the LCD will display “Printer Busy…”. Press the key “ESC” to
exit this menu (returning to the menu “Waveforms”). If there is no any waveform data,
the LCD will display “No Waveform Data!”.
8.4.8 Switch Setting Group

1. Exit the main menu.
2. Press the “GRP”.
Figure 8.4-5 Display of switching setting group

Date: 2011-05-25
Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value, and then press the key “ESC” to exit this menu
(returning to the main menu). After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will display the password
input interface. If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the key “ESC” to
exit the password input interface and return to its original state. If the password is correct, the
“HEALTHY” indicator of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will re-check
the protection setting. If the check doesn’t pass, the protection device will be blocked. If the check
is successful, the LCD will return to its original state.
8.4.9 Delete Records

1. Exit the main menu.
2. Press the “＋”, “－”, “＋”, “－” and key “ENT”; Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu
(returning to the original state). Press the key “ENT” to carry out the deletion.
Figure 8.4-6 Display of deleting report
Note!
The operation of deleting report will delete all messages except for user operation reports
(i.e. control reports), including tripping reports, alarm reports and binary input change
reports. The deleted reports are irrecoverable, so the function shall be used with great
cautious.
8.4.10 Modify Device Clock


Date: 2011-05-25
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Clock” menu, and then press the key
“ENT” to enter clock display.
Figure 8.4-7 Display of modifying clock
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the date or time to be modified.
4. Press the key “＋” or “－”, to modify value, and then press the key “ENT” to save the
modification and return to the main menu.
5. Press the key “ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the main menu.
8.4.11 View Module Information

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press
the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Board Info”, and
then press the “ENT” to enter the menu.
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar.
5. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Information” menu).
8.4.12 Check Software Version

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press
the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

Date: 2011-05-25
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Version Info”, and
then press the “ENT” to enter the menu.
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar.
5. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Information” menu).
8.4.13 Communication Test

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Test” menu, and then press the key
3. Select the command menu “Prot Elements”, “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, users
need to enter the submenu “Device Test” firstly.
4. Select any command menu (takes “Prot Elements” as an example), press the key “ENT”,
two options “All Test” and “Select Test” are provided.
5. If “Select Test” is selected, press the key “ENT”. Press the “＋” or “－” to page up/down,
and then press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar. Move the cursor to select the
corresponding protection element. Press the key “ENT” to execute the communication
test of this protection element, the substation automatic system (SAS) will receive the
corresponding fault report, and view the fault report produced by communication test in
the command menu “Disturb Record Items”.
6. If “All Test” is selected, press the key “ENT” to execute the communication test of all
protection element one by one, the substation automatic system (SAS) will receive all the
fault report.
Note!
If selecting the “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, the substation automatic system can
receive the corresponding self-check report or binary signals, and the self-check report or
binary signals produced by communication test can also be viewed by the two command
menus of “Superv Events” and “IO Events” in the menu “Records”.
8.4.14 Select Language

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Language” menu, then press “ENT”
to enter the menu and the following display will be shown on LCD.

Date: 2011-05-25
Figure 8.4-8 Display of selecting language
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the preferred language and press the key
“ENT” to execute language switching. After language switching is finished, LCD will
return to the main menu, and the display language is changed. Otherwise, press “ESC” to
cancel language switching and return to the main menu.
Note!
The LCD interfaces provided in this chapter are only for references and available for
explaining specific definition of LCD. The actual displayed interfaces maybe different from
these.

Date: 2011-05-25

Date: 2011-05-25
Table of Contents
9 Configurable Function ................................................................... 9-a
9.2 Introduction on PCS-PC software.................................................................. 9-1
9.3 Protective Device Configuration .................................................................... 9-1
9.3.1 Configuration of LED Indicators in Binary Signal Config..................................................... 9-1
9.3.2 Configuration of Binary Input in Binary Signal Config ......................................................... 9-2
9.3.3 Configuration of Binary Output in Binary Signal Config ...................................................... 9-3
9.3.4 Setting configuration ............................................................................................................ 9-4

Date: 2011-05-25

Date: 2011-05-25
By adoption of PCS-PC software, it is able to make binary input and binary output configuration,
LED indicator configuration and setting configuration for PCS-915.
9.2 Introduction on PCS-PC software
PCS-PC software is developed in order to meet customer’s demand on functions of UAPC

platform device such as device configuration and programmable design. It selects substation as
the core of data management and the device as fundamental unit, supporting one substation to
govern many devices. The software provides on-line and off-line functions: on-line mode: Ethernet
connected with the device supporting IEC60870-5-103 and capable of uploading and downloading
configuration files through Ethernet net; off-line mode: off-line setting configuration. In addition, it
also supports programmable logic to meet customer’s demand. Please refer to Instruction
Manual of PCS-PC Auxiliary Software for details.
Overall functions:
Programmable logic (off-line function)
LED indicators configuration (off-line function)
Binary input signals configuration (off-line function)
Binary output signals configuration (off-line function)
Setting configuration (off-line & on-line function)
Real-time display of analogue and digital quantity of device (on-line function)
Display of sequence of report (SOE) (on-line function)
Analysis of waveform (off-line & on-line function)
File downloading/uploading (on-line function)
9.3 Protective Device Configuration
9.3.1 Configuration of LED Indicators in Binary Signal Config

1. This protection device provides 20 LED indicators, 2 LED indicators are defined as,
“HEALTHY” LED and “MISC_ALM“ LED, the rest 18 LEDs can be configured by users as
required.
2. The column “ ” in the right hand side of PCS_PC software/Binary

signal config/LED_indicator_configuration provides elements including protection elements,
alarm elements and binary input elements for LEDs.

Date: 2011-05-25
3. “Latched” check boxes with the LEDS are available. When a check box is selected, the
respective LED could only be reset by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] once
it is lit. If the check box is not selected, the signals will reset automatically once the trigger
signal resets.
4. The column “ ” is used to choose color for each LED. “yellow”, “green” and “red” are
provided to choose from.
5. If the “User_defined_LED_5” is used to indicate disconnector position alarm, configure it as

the following picture.
6. The label of the “User_defined_LED_5” can be edited by double-click it.
7. The signal in the column of “Signal” can be deleted by right-click, and then left-click to execute
“delete” command.
9.3.2 Configuration of Binary Input in Binary Signal Config
1. Pin number of user-defined binary input on module is provided by the column “ ”
on the right of the interface.
2. The next step is to set delay pick up and drop off time in the columns of “ ” and
“ ” (unit: ms) respectively for individual binary inputs.
3. The column “ ” at the right hand side of the screen is a

list of functions available for selection to individual binary inputs. They can be directly dragged
from the list to assigned binary input.

Date: 2011-05-25
4. For example, the contact “ ” ( “B09” means the module located in slot No.09, “P05”
means pin No.05) is intended for normally closed auxiliary contact of bay 01
([BI_52b_@Bay01]), the corresponding binary input signal in the right tree structure is then
dragged to the position at the crossing of column ‘Int. Signal’ and row “ ”.
5. The signal in the column of “Int. Signal” can be deleted by right-click, and then left-click to
execute delete command.
6. The displayed content of the column “ ” can be modified according to user’s

requirement.
9.3.3 Configuration of Binary Output in Binary Signal Config

1. The function is applied for configuration of binary outputs of BO modules of the protective
device.
2. Pin number of user-defined binary input on module is provided by the column
“ ” on the left of the interface.
3. Elements in the column “ ” at the right hand side of the screen

can be dragged to point to a or several binary output contacts.
4. For example, the contact “ ” (“B13” means the module located in slot No.13,
“P01_P02” means pin No.01 to No.02) is intended for tripping BC1, the corresponding output
signal [Op_Trp_BC1] in the right tree structure is then dragged to the position at the crossing
of column ‘Int. Signal’ and row “ ”.
5. The signal added in the column of “Int. Signal” can be deleted by right-click, and then left-click
to execute delete command.

Date: 2011-05-25
6. The displayed content of the column “ ” can be modified according to user’s

requirement.
9.3.4 Setting configuration

After function configuration is finished, disabled protective function is hidden in device and in
setting configuration list of PCS-PC software.
Users can configure the equipment parameters, system settings and etc.
Users can select to show or hide some setting, and modify typical setting values.

Date: 2011-05-25
10 Communications
10 Communications
Table of Contents
10 Communications......................................................................... 10-a
10.1 General Description .................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Rear Communication Port Information ..................................................... 10-1
10.2.1 RS-485 Interface.............................................................................................................. 10-1
10.2.2 Ethernet Interface ............................................................................................................ 10-3
10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication .................................................................................... 10-4
10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port ................................................ 10-4

10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer ............................................................................... 10-5
10.3.2 Initialization ...................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.3 Time Synchronization ...................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.4 Spontaneous Events ........................................................................................................ 10-5
10.3.5 General Interrogation....................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3.6 General Functions ........................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3.7 Disturbance Records ....................................................................................................... 10-6
10.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet .................................................... 10-6

10.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol .......................................... 10-6
10.5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.5.2 Communication Profiles................................................................................................... 10-7
10.5.3 Server Data Organization ................................................................................................ 10-8
10.5.4 Server Features and Configuration ............................................................................... 10-10
10.5.5 ACSI conformance ..........................................................................................................10-11
10.5.6 Logical Nodes ................................................................................................................ 10-15
10.6 DNP3.0 Interface........................................................................................ 10-18

10.6.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 10-18
10.6.2 Link Layer Functions ..................................................................................................... 10-19

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
10.6.3 Transport Functions ....................................................................................................... 10-19
10.6.4 Application Layer Functions .......................................................................................... 10-19
List of Figures
Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements ..................................................... 10-2
Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable ........................................................................ 10-3
Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure .................................................................. 10-4

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
This section introduces NR’s remote communications interfaces. The protective device is
compaitible with three protocols via the rear communication interface (RS-485 or Ethernet). The
protocol provided by the protective device is indicated in the submenu in the “Comm Settings”
column. Using the keypad and LCD to set the parameter [Protocol_RS485A] and
[Protocol_RS485B], the corresponding protocol will be selected.
The rear EIA RS-485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection no matter
whichever protocol is selected. It has advantage that 32 protective devices can be “daisy chained”
together in electrical connection using a twisted pair.
It should be noted that the descriptions in this section do not aim to fully introduce the protocol
itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred for this information. This
section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the relay.
10.2 Rear Communication Port Information
10.2.1 RS-485 Interface

This protective device provides two rear RS-485 communication ports, and each port has three
terminals in the 12-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay. Each port has a
ground terminal for earth shield of communication cable. The rear ports provide RS-485 serial data
communication and are intended for permanently wired connection to a remote control center.
10.2.1.1 EIA RS-485 Standardized Bus
The EIA RS-485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the
product. The connection is polarized and whilst the product’s connection diagrams indicate the
polarization of the connection terminals it should be borne in mind that there is no agreed
definition of which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, but
the communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.
10.2.1.2 Bus Termination
The EIA RS-485 bus must have 120Ω (Ohm) ½ Watt terminating resistors fitted at either end
across the signal wires (refer to Figure 10.2-1). Some devices may be able to provide the bus
terminating resistors by different connection or configuration arrangements, in which case
separate external components will not be required. However, this product does not provide such a
facility, so an external termination resistor is required when it is located at the bus terminus.

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
EIA RS-485
Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements
10.2.1.3 Bus Connections & Topologies
The EIA RS-485 requires that each device is directly connected to the physical cable i.e. the
communications bus. Stubs and tees are strictly forbidden, such as star topologies. Loop bus
topologies are not part of the EIA RS-485 standard and are forbidden also.
Two-core screened cable is recommended. The specification of the cable will be dependent on the
application, although a multi-strand 0.5mm2 per core is normally adequate. Total cable length
must not exceed 500m. The screen must be continuous and connected to ground at one end,
normally at the master connection point; it is important to avoid circulating currents, especially
when the cable runs between buildings, for both safety and noise reasons.
This product does not provide a signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is present
in the bus cable then it must be ignored, although it must have continuity for the benefit of other
devices connected to the bus. The signal ground shall not be connected to the cables screen or to
the product’s chassis at any stage. This is for both safety and noise reasons.
10.2.1.4 Biasing
It may also be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal
level has an indeterminate state due to inactively driven of tbus. This can occur when all the slaves
are in receive mode and the master unit is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit mode. The
reason is that the master purposefully waits in receive mode, or even in a high impedance state,
until it has something to transmit. Jabber can result in the loss of first bits of the first character in
the packet for receiving device(s), which will lead to the rejection of messages for slave units,
causing non-responding between master unit and slave unit. This could brings poor response
times (due to retries), increase in message error counters, erratic communications, and even a
complete failure to communicate.
Biasing requires that the signal lines shall be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1V.
There should be only one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection
point. The DC source used for the bias must be clean; otherwise noise will be injected. Please
note that some devices may (optionally) be able to provide the bus bias that the external
components will not be required.
Note!

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
It is extremely important that the 120Ω termination resistors are fitted. Failure to do so
will result in an excessive bias voltage that may damage the devices connected to the
bus.
As the field voltage is much higher than that required, NR cannot assume
responsibility for any damage that may occur to a device connected to the network as
a result of incorrect application of this voltage.
Ensure that the field voltage is not being used for other purposes (i.e. powering logic
inputs) as this may cause noise to be passed to the communication network.
10.2.2 Ethernet Interface

This protective device can provide four rear Ethernet interfaces (optional) and they are unattached
to each other. Parameters of each Ethernet port can be configured in the submenu “Comm
Settings”.
10.2.2.1 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable
It is recommended to use twisted screened eight-core cable as the communication cable. A picture
is shown bellow.
Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable
10.2.2.2 Connections and Topologies
Each device is connected with an exchanger via communication cable, and thereby it forms a star
structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. SCADA is also
connected to the exchanger acting as the master station, and every device which has been
connected to the exchanger will act as a slave unit.

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure
10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication

The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission
Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-5-1 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform
communication with protective device. The standard configuration of IEC60870-5-103 protocol is
using a twisted pair EIA RS-485 connection over distances up to 500m. It also supports an
Ethernet for communication between devices. The relay operates as a slave unit in the system to
respond commands received from master station.
To use the rear port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the relevant settings of the protective
device must be configured by using keypad and LCD user interface. In the submenu “Comm
Settings”, set the parameters [Protocol_RS485A], [Protocol_RS485B] and [Baud_RS485]. To use
the Ethernet port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the IP address and the submask of each
Ethernet port shall be set in the same submenu. Please refer to the corresponding section in
Chapter “Settings” for further details.
10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port
The IEC60870-5-103 interface over serial port (RS-485) is a master/slave interface and the
protective device is the slave device.
The protective device conforms to compatibility level 3.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:
Initialization (reset)
Time synchronization
Event record extraction
General interrogation
General commands

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
Disturbance records
10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer

Two EIA RS-485 standardized ports are available for IEC60870-5-103 in this protective device.
The transmission speed is optional: 4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s or 38400 bit/s.
The link layer strictly abides by the rules defined in the IEC60870-5-103.
10.3.2 Initialization
When the protective device is powered up, or the communication parameters are changed, a reset
command is required to initialize the communications. The protective device will respond to either
of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference is that the Reset CU will clear
any unsent messages in the transmit buffer.
The protective device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5,
the COT (Cause Of Transmission) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB
depending on the nature of the reset command.
10.3.3 Time Synchronization

The time and date of protective device can be set by time synchronization feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The transmission delay as specified in IEC60870-5-103 will be
corrected in the protective device. If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm
message, then the protective device will respond with a confirmation. Whether the
time-synchronization message is sent as a send confirmation or a broadcast (send/no reply)
message, a time synchronization class 1 event will be generated/produced.
If the protective device clock is synchronized using the IRIG-B input, the protection device will not
be able to set the time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. For attempt to set the time via the
interface, the protective device will create an event with the date and time taken from the IRIG-B
synchronized internal clock.
10.3.4 Spontaneous Events

Events are categorized by the following information:
Type identification (TYP)
Function type (FUN)
Information number (INF)
Messages sent to substation automation system are grouped according to IEC60870-5-103

protocol. Operation elements are sent by ASDU2 (time-tagged message with relative time), and
status of binary Input and alarm element are sent by ASDU1 (time-tagged message). The cause of
transmission (COT) of these responses is 1.
The complete list of all events produced by the protective device can be printed by choosing the
submenu “IEC103 Info” in the menu “Print”.

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
10.3.5 General Interrogation

The GI can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and the information
numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle. The GI cycle strictly abides by the rules defined
in the IEC60870-5-103.
Refer the IEC60870-5-103 standard can get the enough details about general interrogation.
10.3.6 General Functions

The general functions can be used to read the setting and protection measurement of the relay,
and modify the setting. Two supported type identifications are ASDU 21 and ASDU 10. For more
details about generic functions, please see the IEC60870-5-103 standard.
Generic service group numbers supported by the relay can be printed by the submenu “IEC103
Info” in the menu “Print”.
10.3.7 Disturbance Records

This protective device can store up to 64 disturbance records in its memory. Pickup of fault
detector or operation of relay will be stored as disturbance recorders in the protective device.
The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the
standard mechanisms described in IEC60870-5-103.
It can be printed by the submenu “IEC103 Info” in the menu “Print”
10.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet
The IEC60870-5-103 interface over Ethernet is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave
device. All the functions provided by this relay are based on generic functions of the
IEC60870-5-103. This relay will send all the relevant information on group caption to SAS or RTU
after establishing a successful communication link.
10.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol
10.5.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard is the result of years of work by electric utilities and vendors of electronic
device to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards
describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration,
testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:
IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview
IEC 61850-2: Glossary
IEC 61850-3: General requirements
IEC 61850-4: System and project management

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models
IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations

related to IEDs
IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device - Principles
and models
IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device - Abstract
communication service interface (ACSI)
IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device – Common
data classes
IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device – Compatible
logical node classes and data classes
IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Mappings to MMS (ISO
9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3
IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link
IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
ISO/IEC 8802-3
IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing
These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended
that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.
10.5.2 Communication Profiles

PCS-915 series relay supports IEC 61850 server services over TCP/IP communication protocol
stacks. The TCP/IP profile requires an IP address to establish communications.
1. MMS protocol
IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper
(application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number
of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN
environment. Actual IEC 61850-7-2 abstract services and objects are mapped to MMS protocol
services in IEC61850-8-1.
2. Client/server
This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and
communication activity is controlled by the client. IEC61850 clients are often substation computers
running HMI programs or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation device such as
protection relays, meters, RTUs, transformer, tap changers, or bay controllers.
3. Peer-to-peer

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
This is a non-connection-oriented high speed communication between substation device, such as

protection relays. GOOSE is the method of peer-to-peer communication.
4. Substation configuration language (SCL)
A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe IED and communication
system realized according to IEC 61850-5 and IEC 61850-7. Each configured device has an IEC
Capability Description (ICD) file and a Configured IED Description (CID) file. The substation single
line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The entire substation
configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The SCD file is the
combination of the individual ICD files and the SSD file, moreover, add communication system
parameters (MMS, GOOSE, control block, SV control block) and the connection relationship of
GOOSE and SV to SCD file.
10.5.3 Server Data Organization

IEC61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. Each IED represents one
IEC61850 physical device. An IEC61850 physical device can contain one or more logical device(s)
(for proxy). Each logical device can contain many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD contains
information about the IED physical device. The logical node LLN0 contains information about the
IED logical device. Each logical node can contain many data objects. Each data object is
composed of data attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each level
for performing various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.
10.5.3.1 Digital Status Values
The GGIO logical node is used to provide access to digital status points (including general I/O
inputs and warnings) and associated timestamps and quality flags. The data content must be
configured before using. GGIO provides digital status points for access by clients. It is intended for
the use of GGIO by client to access to digital status values from PCS-915 series relays. Clients
can utilize the IEC61850 buffered report from GGIO to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and
HMI display screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering
capability reduces the chances of missing data state changes. All needed status data objects are
transmitted to HMI clients via buffered reporting, and the corresponding buffered reporting control
block (BRCB) is defined in LLN0.
10.5.3.2 Analog Values
Most of measured analog values are available through the MMXU logical nodes, and metering
values in MMTR, the else is in MMXN, MSQI and so on. Data of each MMXU logical node is
provided from a IED current/voltage “source”. There is one MMXU available for each configurable
source. Data of MMXU1 is provided from CT/VT source 1 (usually for protection purpose), and
data of MMXU2 is provided from CT/VT source 2 (usually for monitor and display purpose). All
these analog data objects are transmitted to HMI clients via unbuffered reporting periodically, and
the corresponding unbuffered reporting control block (URCB) is defined in LLN0. MMXUx logical
nodes provide the following data for each source:
MMXU.MX.Hz: frequency

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
MMXU.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle
10.5.3.3 Protection Logical Nodes
The following list describes the protection elements for all PCS-915 series relays. The specified
relay will contain a subset of protection elements from this list.
PDIF: current differential and transfer trip
RBRF:Breaker failure
PTOC: Time overcurrent
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function
The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags, instead of any
element has its own start (pickup) flag separately, all the elements share a common start (pickup)
flags “PTRC.ST.Str.general”. The operate flag for PDIF1 is “PDIF1.ST.Op.general”. For PCS-915
series relay protection elements, these flags take their values from related module for the
corresponding element. Similar to digital status values, the protection trip information is reported
via BRCB, and it also locates in LLN0.
10.5.3.4 LLN0 and Other Logical Nodes
Logical node LLN0 is essential for an IEC61850 based IED. This LN shall be used to address
common issues for Logical Devices. Most of the public services, the common settings, control
values and some device oriented data objects are available here. The public services may be
BRCB, URCB and GSE control blocks and similar global defined for the whole device; the
common settings include all the setting items of communication settings. System settings and
some of the protection setting items, which can be configured to two or more protection elements
(logical nodes). In LLN0, the item Loc is a device control object, this item indicates the local
operation for complete logical device, when it is true, all the remote control commands to the IED
will be blocked until Loc is changed to false. In PCS-915 series relays, besides the logical nodes
described above, there are some other logical nodes in the IEDs:
LPHD: Physical device information, the logical node to model common issues for physical
device.

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning, it is used to connect the “operate” outputs of one or more
protection functions to a common “trip” to be transmitted to XCBR. In addition or alternatively, any
combination of “operate” outputs of protection functions may be combined to a new “operate” of
PTRC.
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function. It triggers fault wave recorder and its output refers to
the “IEEE Standard Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power System” (IEC
60255-24). All enabled channels are included in the recording and is independent of the trigger
mode.
10.5.4 Server Features and Configuration

10.5.4.1 Buffered/unbuffered Reporting
IEC61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting control blocks are located in LLN0, they can be
configured to transmit information of protection trip information (in the Protection logical nodes),
binary status values (in GGIO) and analog measured/calculated values (in MMXU, MMTR and
MSQI). The reporting control blocks can be configured in CID files, and then be sent to the IED via
an IEC61850 client. The following items can be configured.
TrgOps: Trigger options.
The following bits are supported by PCS-915 series relays:
－ Bit 1: Data-change
－ Bit 4: Integrity
－ Bit 5: General interrogation
OptFlds: Option Fields.
The following bits are supported by PCS-915 series relays:
－ Bit 1: Sequence-number
－ Bit 2: Report-time-stamp
－ Bit 3: Reason-for-inclusion
－ Bit 4: Data-set-name
－ Bit 5: Data-reference
－ Bit 6: Buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only)
－ Bit 7: EntryID (for buffered reports only)
－ Bit 8: Conf-revision
－ Bit 9: Segmentation
IntgPd: Integrity period.
BufTm: Buffer time.

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
10.5.4.2 File Transfer
MMS file services allows transfer of oscillography, event record or other files from a PCS-915
series relay.
10.5.4.3 Timestamps
The timestamp values associated with all IEC61850 data items represent the time of the last
change of either the value or quality flags of the data item.
10.5.4.4 Logical Node Name Prefixes
IEC61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters.
The name is composed of:
A five or six-character name prefix.
A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).
A one or two-character instantiation index.
Complete names are in the form of xxxxxxPTOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is
configurable. Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC61850 parts 6 and
7-2. It is recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation
project.
10.5.5 ACSI conformance

10.5.5.1 ACSI Basic Conformance Statement
Services Client Server PCS-915
Client-Server Roles
B11 Server side (of Two-party Application-Association) － C1 Y
B12 Client side (of Two-party Application-Association) C1 － N
SCSMS Supported
B21 SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used N N Y
B22 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used N N N
B23 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used N N N
B24 SCSM: other N N N
Generic Substation Event Model (GSE)
B31 Publisher side － O Y
B32 Subscriber side O － Y
Transmission Of Sampled Value Model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side － O N
B42 Subscriber side O － N
Where:

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
C1: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared
O: Optional
M: Mandatory
Y: Supported by PCS-915 relay
N: Currently not supported by PCS-915 relay
10.5.5.2 ACSI Models Conformance Statement
M1 Logical device C2 C2 Y
M2 Logical node C3 C3 Y
M3 Data C4 C4 Y
M4 Data set C5 C5 Y
M5 Substitution O O Y
M6 Setting group control O O Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control O O Y
M7-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M7-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M7-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow Y Y N
M7-7 entryID Y Y Y
M7-8 BufTm N N N
M7-9 IntgPd Y Y Y
M7-10 GI Y Y Y
M8 Unbuffered report control M M Y
M8-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M8-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M8-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M8-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M8-6 BufTm N N N
M8-7 IntgPd N Y Y
Logging
M9 Log control O O N

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
M9-1 IntgPd N N N
M10 Log O O N
GSE
M12 GOOSE O O Y
M13 GSSE O O N
M14 Multicast SVC O O N
M15 Unicast SVC O O N
M16 Time M M Y
M17 File transfer O O Y
Where:
C2: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared
C3: Shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared
C4: Shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has
been declared
C5: Shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared
M: Mandatory
Y: Supported by PCS-900 series relays
N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays
10.5.5.3 ACSI Services Conformance Statement
Service Server/Publisher PCS-900 Series
Server
S1 ServerDirectory M Y
Application association
S2 Associate M Y
S3 Abort M Y
S4 Release M Y
Logical device
S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory M Y
Logical node
S6 LogicalNodeDirectory M Y
S7 GetAllDataValues M Y
Data
S8 GetDataValues M Y

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
S9 SetDataValues M Y
S10 GetDataDirectory M Y
S11 GetDataDefinition M Y
Data set
S12 GetDataSetValues M Y
S13 SetDataSetValues O Y
S14 CreateDataSet O N
S15 DeleteDataSet O N
S16 GetDataSetDirectory M Y
Substitution
S17 SetDataValues M Y
Setting group control
S18 SelectActiveSG M/O Y
S19 SelectEditSG M/O Y
S20 SetSGValuess M/O Y
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues M/O Y
S22 GetSGValues M/O Y
S23 GetSGCBValues M/O Y
Reporting
Buffered report control block
S24 Report M Y
S24-1 data-change M Y
S24-2 qchg-change M N
S24-3 data-update M N
S25 GetBRCBValues M Y
S26 SetBRCBValues M Y
Unbuffered report control block
S27 Report M Y
S27-1 data-change M Y
S27-2 qchg-change M N
S27-3 data-update M N
S28 GetURCBValues M Y
S29 SetURCBValues M Y
Logging
Log control block

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
S30 GetLCBValues O N
S31 SetLCBValues O N
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime O N
S33 QueryLogAfter O N
S34 GetLogStatusValues O N
Generic substation event model (GSE)
GOOSE control block
S35 SendGOOSEMessage M Y
S36 GetGoReference O Y
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O N
S38 GetGoCBValues M Y
S39 SetGoCBValuess M N
Control
S51 Select O N
S52 SelectWithValue M Y
S53 Cancel M Y
S54 Operate M Y
S55 Command-Termination O Y
S56 TimeActivated-Operate O N
File transfer
S57 GetFile M/O Y
S58 SetFile O N
S59 DeleteFile O N
S60 GetFileAttributeValues M/O Y
Time
SNTP M Y
10.5.6 Logical Nodes

10.5.6.1 Logical Nodes Table
PCS-915 relays support IEC61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table. Note that the
actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code.
Nodes PCS-915
L: System Logical Nodes
LPHD: Physical device information YES

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
Nodes PCS-915
LLN0: Logical node zero YES
P: Logical Nodes For Protection Functions
PDIF: Differential YES
PDIR: Direction comparison －
PDIS: Distance －
PDOP: Directional overpower －
PDUP: Directional underpower －
PFRC: Rate of change of frequency －
PHAR: Harmonic restraint －
PHIZ: Ground detector －
PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent －
PMRI: Motor restart inhibition －
PMSS: Motor starting time supervision －
POPF: Over power factor －
PPAM: Phase angle measuring －
PSCH: Protection scheme －
PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault －
PTEF: Transient earth fault －
PTOC: Time overcurrent YES
PTOF: Overfrequency －
PTOV: Overvoltage －
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning YES
PTTR: Thermal overload －
PTUC: Undercurrent －
PTUV: Undervoltage －
PUPF: Underpower factor －
PTUF: Underfrequency －
PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent －
PVPH: Volts per Hz －
PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed －
R: Logical Nodes For Protection Related Functions
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function YES
RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue －
RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary －
RDRS: Disturbance record handling －

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
Nodes PCS-915
RBRF: Breaker failure YES
RDIR: Directional element －
RFLO: Fault locator －
RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking －
RREC: Autoreclosing －
RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing －
C: Logical Nodes For Control
CALH: Alarm handling －
CCGR: Cooling group control －
CILO: Interlocking －
CPOW: Point-on-wave switching －
CSWI: Switch controller －
G: Logical Nodes For Generic References
GAPC: Generic automatic process control －
GGIO: Generic process I/O YES
GSAL: Generic security application －
I: Logical Nodes For Interfacing And Archiving
IARC: Archiving －
IHMI: Human machine interface －
ITCI: Telecontrol interface －
ITMI: Telemonitoring interface －
A: Logical Nodes For Automatic Control
ANCR: Neutral current regulator －
ARCO: Reactive power control －
ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller －
AVCO: Voltage control －
M: Logical Nodes For Metering And Measurement
MDIF: Differential measurements YES
MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics －
MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic －
MMTR: Metering －
MMXN: Non phase related measurement －
MMXU: Measurement YES
MSQI: Sequence and imbalance －
MSTA: Metering statistics －

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
Nodes PCS-915
S: Logical Nodes For Sensors And Monitoring
SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs －
SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas) －
SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid) －
SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges －
X: Logical Nodes For Switchgear
TCTR: Current transformer YES
TVTR: Voltage transformer YES
Y: Logical Nodes For Power Transformers
YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil) －
YLTC: Tap changer －
YPSH: Power shunt －
YPTR: Power transformer －
Z: Logical Nodes For Further Power System Equipment
ZAXN: Auxiliary network －
ZBAT: Battery －
ZBSH: Bushing －
ZCAB: Power cable －
ZCAP: Capacitor bank －
ZCON: Converter －
ZGEN: Generator －
ZGIL: Gas insulated line －
ZLIN: Power overhead line －
ZMOT: Motor －
ZREA: Reactor －
ZRRC: Rotating reactive component －
ZSAR: Surge arrestor －
ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter －
ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component －
10.6 DNP3.0 Interface
10.6.1 Overview
The descriptions given here are intended to accompany this relay. The DNP3.0 protocol is not
described here; please refer to the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the DNP3.0

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
implementation. This manual only specifies which objects, variations and qualifiers are supported
in this relay, and also specifies what data is available from this relay via DNP3.0.
The relay operates as a DNP3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol, plus some of
the features from level 3. The DNP3.0 communication uses the EIA RS-485 at the rear of this relay.
The data format is 1 start bit, 8 data bits, no parity bit and 1 stop bit.
10.6.2 Link Layer Functions

Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the linker layer functions.
10.6.3 Transport Functions

Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the transport functions.
10.6.4 Application Layer Functions

10.6.4.1 Time Synchronization
1. Time delay measurement
Master/Slave Function Code Object Variation Qualifier

Master 0x17 - - -
Slave 0x81 0x34 0x02 0x07
2. Read time of device

Master 0x01 0x34 0x00, 0x01 0x04-
Slave 0x81 0x34 0x02 0x07
3. Write time of device

Master 0x02 0x32 0x01 0x00, 0x01, 0x07, 0x08
Slave 0x81 - - -
10.6.4.2 Supported Writing Functions
1. Write time of device
See Section 10.6.4.1 for the details.
2. Reset the CU (Reset IIN bit7)

Master 0x02 0x50 0x01 0x00, 0x01
Slave 0x81 - - -
10.6.4.3 Supported Reading Functions
1. Supported qualifiers
Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x06 0x07 0x08

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
Slave Variation 0x00 0x01 0x01 0x07 0x08
2. Supported objects and variations
Object 1, Binary inputs
Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02

Slave Variation 0x02 0x01 0x02
The protection operation signals, alarm signals and binary input state change signals are
transported respectively according to the variation sequence in above table.
Object 2, SOE
Master Qualifier 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03

Slave Qualifier 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03
If the master qualifier is “0x07”, the slave responsive qualifier is “0x27”; and if the master
qualifier is “0x01”, “0x06” or “0x08”, the slave responsive qualifier is “0x28”.
Object 30, Analog inputs
Master Qualifier 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04

Slave Qualifier 0x01 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04
The metering values are transported firstly, and then the protection measurement values are
transported.
Object 40, Analog outputs
Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02

Slave Variation 0x01 0x01 0x02
The protection settings are transported in this object.
Object 50, Time Synchronization
See Section 10.6.4.1 for the details.
3. Class 0 data request
The master adopts the “Object 60” for the Class 0 data request and the variation is “0x01”.
The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 1”, “Object 30” and “Object 40” (see
“Supported objects and variations” in Section 10.6.4.3).
4. Class 1 data request
The master adopts the “Object 60” for the Class 1 data request and the variation is “0x02”.
The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 2” (see “Supported objects and
variations” in Section 10.6.4.3).
5. Multiple object request

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications
The master adopts the “Object 60” for the multiple object request and the variation is “0x01”,
“0x02”, “0x03” and “0x04”.
The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 1”, “Object 2”, “Object 30” and “Object
40” (see “Supported objects and variations” in Section 10.6.4.3).
10.6.4.4 Remote Control Functions
The function code 0x03 and 0x04 are supported in this relay. The function code 0x03 is for the
remote control with selection; and the function code 0x04 is for the remote control with execution.
The selection operation must be executed before the execution operation, and the single point
control object can be supported to this relay.
Master Qualifier 0x17 0x27 0x18 0x28

Slave Qualifier 0x17 0x27 0x18 0x28
The “Object 12” is for the remote control functions.
Master Variation 0x01 0x01: closing

Control Code
Slave Variation 0x01 0x10: tripping

Date: 2011-05-24
10 Communications

Date: 2011-05-24
11 Installation
11 Installation
Table of Contents
11 Installation ................................................................................... 11-a
11.1 General .......................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Safety Instructions ....................................................................................... 11-1
11.3 Checking the Shipment ............................................................................... 11-2
11.4 Material and Tools Required........................................................................ 11-2
11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions.................................................. 11-2
11.6 Mechanical Installation ................................................................................ 11-3
11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring ................................................................ 11-5
11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines .......................................................................................................11-5
11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding ............................................................................................................11-5
11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device ...................................................................................11-6
11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation..............................................................................11-7
11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring.........................................................................................................11-7
11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables...............................................................................................11-7
List of Figures
Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of 4U equipment ........................................................................... 11-3
Figure 11.6-2 Panel cut-out dimensions of 4U equipment .................................................... 11-3
Figure 11.6-3 Dimensions of 8U equipment ........................................................................... 11-4
Figure 11.6-4 Panel cut-out dimensions of 8U equipment .................................................... 11-4
Figure 11.6-5 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot .................. 11-5
Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system ................................................................................ 11-6
Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this relay ............................................................................ 11-7
Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination ........................................................................... 11-7
Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables ................................... 11-8

Date: 2011-05-24
11 Installation

Date: 2011-05-24
11 Installation
11.1 General
The equipment must be shipped, stored and installed with the greatest care.
Choose the place of installation such that the communication interface and the controls on the
front of the device are easily accessible.
Air must circulate freely around the equipment. Observe all the requirements regarding place of
installation and ambient conditions given in this instruction manual.
Take care that the external wiring is properly brought into the equipment and terminated correctly
and pay special attention to grounding. Strictly observe the corresponding guidelines contained in
this section.
11.2 Safety Instructions
Modules and units may only be replaced by correspondingly trained personnel. Always observe
the basic precautions to avoid damage due to electrostatic discharge when handling the
equipment.
In certain cases, the settings have to be configured according to the demands of the engineering
configuration after replacement. It is therefore assumed that the personnel who replace modules
and units are familiar with the use of the operator program on the service PC.
DANGER! Only insert or withdraw the PWR module while the power supply is switched
off. To this end, disconnect the power supply cable that connects with the PWR module.
WARNING! Only insert or withdraw other modules while the power supply is switched off.
WARNING! The modules may only be inserted in the slots designated in Section 6.2.
Components can be damaged or destroyed by inserting boards in the wrong slots.
DANGER! Improper handling of the equipment can cause damage or an incorrect
response of the equipment itself or the primary plant.
WARNING! Industry packs and ribbon cables may only be replaced or the positions of
jumpers be changed on a workbench appropriately designed for working on electronic

equipment. The modules, bus backplanes are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when
not in the unit's housing.
The basic precautions to guard against electrostatic discharge are as follows:
Should boards have to be removed from this relay installed in a grounded cubicle in an HV

Date: 2011-05-24
11 Installation
switchgear installation, please discharge yourself by touching station ground (the cubicle)
beforehand.
Only hold electronic boards at the edges, taking care not to touch the components.
Only works on boards that have been removed from the cubicle on a workbench designed for
electronic equipment and wear a grounded wristband. Do not wear a grounded wristband,
however, while inserting or withdrawing units.
Always store and ship the electronic boards in their original packing. Place electronic parts in
electrostatic screened packing materials.
11.3 Checking the Shipment
Check that the consignment is complete immediately upon receipt. Notify the nearest NR
Company or agent, should departures from the delivery note, the shipping papers or the order be
found.
Visually inspect all the material when unpacking it. When there is evidence of transport damage,
lodge a claim immediately in writing with the last carrier and notify the nearest NR Company or
agent.
If the equipment is not going to be installed immediately, store all the parts in their original packing
in a clean dry place at a moderate temperature. The humidity at a maximum temperature and the
permissible storage temperature range in dry air are listed in Section 2.3.
11.4 Material and Tools Required
The necessary mounting kits will be provided, including screws, pincers and assembly
instructions.
A suitable drill and spanners are required to secure the cubicles to the floor using the plugs
provided (if this relay is mounted in cubicles).
11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions
The place of installation should permit easy access especially to front of the device, i.e. to the
human machine interface of the equipment.
There should also be free access at the rear of the equipment for additions and replacement of
electronic boards.
Since every piece of technical equipment can be damaged or destroyed by inadmissible ambient
conditions, such as:
1. The location should not be exposed to excessive air pollution (dust, aggressive substances).
2. Severe vibration, extreme changes of temperature, high levels of humidity, surge voltages of

Date: 2011-05-24
11 Installation
high amplitude and short rise time and strong induced magnetic fields should be avoided as
far as possible.
3. Air must not be allowed to circulate freely around the equipment.
The equipment can in principle be mounted in any attitude, but it is normally mounted vertically
(visibility of markings).
WARNING! Excessively high temperature can appreciably reduce the operating life of
this relay.
11.6 Mechanical Installation
The relay is made of a single-layer 4U height or two-layer 8U height 19" chassis with 8 connectors
on its rear panel.
Following two figures show the dimensions of 4U relay for reference in mounting.
Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of 4U equipment
465.0
4-Ф6.8
450.0
Figure 11.6-2 Panel cut-out dimensions of 4U equipment
Following two figures show the dimensions of 8U relay for reference in mounting.

Date: 2011-05-24
11 Installation
482.6
291 465.0
101.6
354.8
76.2
101.6
Figure 11.6-3 Dimensions of 8U equipment
465.0
450.0
8-Ф6.8
Figure 11.6-4 Panel cut-out dimensions of 8U equipment
NOTE! It is necessary to leave enough space top and bottom of the cut-out in the cubicle
for heat emission of this relay.
The safety instructions must be abided by when installing the boards, please see Section 11.2 for
the details.
Following figure shows the installation way of a module being plugged into a corresponding slot.

Date: 2011-05-24
11 Installation
Figure 11.6-5 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot
In the case of equipment supplied in cubicles, place the cubicles on the foundations that have
been prepared. Take care while doing so not to jam or otherwise damage any of the cables that
have already been installed. Secure the cubicles to the foundations.
11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring

11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines
Switching operations in HV installations generate transient over voltages on control signal cables.
There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical installations that can induce
spurious currents in the devices themselves or the leads connected to them.
All these influences can influence the operation of electronic apparatus.
On the other hand, electronic apparatus can transmit interference that can disrupt the operation of
other apparatus.
In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain standards have to be observed
with respect to grounding, wiring and screening.
NOTE! All these precautions can only be effective if the station ground is of good quality.
11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding

The cubicle must be designed and fitted out such that the impedance for RF interference of the
ground path from the electronic device to the cubicle ground terminal is as low as possible.
Metal accessories such as side plates, blanking plates etc., must be effectively connected
surface-to-surface to the grounded frame to ensure a low-impedance path to ground for RF
interference. The contact surfaces must not only conduct well, they must also be non-corroding.
NOTE! If the above conditions are not fulfilled, there is a possibility of the cubicle or parts
of it forming a resonant circuit at certain frequencies that would amplify the transmission
of interference by the devices installed and also reduce their immunity to induced

Date: 2011-05-24
11 Installation
interference.
Movable parts of the cubicle such as doors (front and back) or hinged equipment frames must be
effectively grounded to the frame by three braided copper strips (see Figure 11.7-1).
The metal parts of the cubicle housing and the ground rail are interconnected electrically
conducting and corrosion proof. The contact surfaces shall be as large as possible.
NOTE! For metallic connections please observe the voltage difference of both materials
according to the electrochemical code.
The cubicle ground rail must be effectively connected to the station ground rail by a grounding strip
(braided copper).
Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system
11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device

There is a ground terminal on the rear panel, and the ground braided copper strip can be
connected with it. Take care that the grounding strip is always as short as possible. The main thing
is that the device is only grounded at one point. Grounding loops from unit to unit are not allowed.
There are some ground terminals on some connectors of this relay, and the sign is “GND”. All the
ground terminals are connected in the cabinet of this relay. So, the ground terminal on the rear
panel (see Figure 11.7-2) is the only ground terminal of this device.

Date: 2011-05-24
11 Installation
Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this relay
11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation

High frequency currents are produced by interference in the ground connections and because of
skin effect at these frequencies, only the surface region of the grounding strips is of consequence.
The grounding strips must therefore be of (preferably tinned) braided copper and not round copper
conductors, as the cross-section of round copper would have to be too large.
Proper terminations must be fitted to both ends (press/pinch fit and tinned) with a hole for bolting
them firmly to the items to be connected.
The surfaces to which the grounding strips are bolted must be electrically conducting and
non-corroding.
The following figure shows the ground strip and termination.
Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination
11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring

There are several types of cables that are used in the connection of this relay: braided copper
cable, serial communication cable etc. Recommendation of each cable:
Grounding: braided copper cable, 2.5mm2 ~ 6.0mm2
Power supply, binary inputs & outputs: brained copper cable, 1.0mm2 ~ 2.5mm2
AC voltage inputs: brained copper cable, 1.0mm2 ~ 2.5mm2
AC current inputs: brained copper cable, 1.5mm2 ~ 4.0mm2
Serial communication: 4-core shielded braided cable
Ethernet communication: 4-pair screened twisted category 5E cable
11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables

A female connector is used for connecting the wires with it, and then a female connector plugs into
a corresponding male connector that is in the front of one board. See Chapter “Hardware” for
further details about the pin defines of these connectors.
The following figure shows the glancing demo about the wiring for the electrical cables.

Date: 2011-05-24
11 Installation
Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables
DANGER! Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this
equipment to be opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a
dangerously high voltage.

Date: 2011-05-24
12 Commissioning
12 Commissioning
Table of Contents
12 Commissioning ........................................................................... 12-a
12.1 General......................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 Safety Instructions ...................................................................................... 12-1
12.3 Commission Tools ...................................................................................... 12-2
12.4 Setting Familiarization ................................................................................ 12-2
12.5 Product Checks ........................................................................................... 12-3
12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized .......................................................................................... 12-3
12.5.2 With the Relay Energized ................................................................................................ 12-5
12.5.3 Protection Function Checks ............................................................................................ 12-7
12.5.4 Print Fault Report........................................................................................................... 12-32
12.5.5 On-load Checks ............................................................................................................. 12-32
12.5.6 Final Checks .................................................................................................................. 12-32

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
12.1 General
This relay is fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection
functions in software. The relay employs a high degree of self-checking and in the unlikely event of
a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning test does not need to be as
extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays.
To commission numerical relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning
correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay.
Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this manual for
completion as required.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the
safety and technical data sections and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
12.2 Safety Instructions
WARNING! Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation.
Non-observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property
damage.
WARNING! Only the qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after
becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well
as with the applicable safety regulations.
Particular attention must be drawn to the following:
The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor
before any other electrical connection is made.
Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply
voltage or to the measuring and test quantities.
Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply
voltage (storage capacitors!)
The limit values stated in the Chapter “Technical Data” must not be exceeded at all, not even
during testing and commissioning.
When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other
measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip circuits and
maybe also close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are
disconnected from the device unless expressly stated.

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
DANGER! Current transformer secondary circuits must have been short-circuited before
the current leads to the device are disconnected.
WARNING! Primary test may only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar
with the commissioning of protection system, the operation of the plant and safety rules
and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.).
12.3 Commission Tools
Minimum equipment required:
Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set with interval timer.
Multimeter with suitable AC current range and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0~440V and 0~250V
respectively.
Continuity tester (if not included in the multimeter).
Phase angle meter.
Phase rotation meter.
NOTE! Modern test set may contain many of the above features in one unit.
Optional equipment:
An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500V (for
insulation resistance test when required).
A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port to be
tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during commissioning).
EIA RS-485 to EIA RS-232 converter (if EIA RS-485 IEC60870-5-103 port is being tested).
PCS-915 serials dedicated protection tester HELP-2000.
12.4 Setting Familiarization
When commissioning this device for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become
familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. A detailed description of the menu
structure of this relay is contained in Chapter “Operation Theory” and Chapter “Settings”.
With the front cover in place all keys are accessible. All menu cells can be read. The LED
indicators and alarms can be reset. Protection or configuration settings can be changed, or fault
and event records cleared. However, menu cells will require the appropriate password to be
entered before changes can be made.

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as

PCS-9700 SAS software), the menu can be viewed one page at a time to display a full column of
data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on
disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user
manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become
familiar with its operation.
12.5 Product Checks
These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to ensure that it has
not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity
measurements are within the stated tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is
advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow them restoration later. This could be done
by extracting the settings from the relay itself via printer or manually creating a setting record.
12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized

This relay is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored. Commissioning tests can
be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and conjunctive tests. The function
tests are carried out according to user’s correlative regulations.
The following tests are necessary to ensure the normal operation of the equipment before it is first
put into service.
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware
defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by
self-monitoring when the DC power is supplied.
User interfaces test
Binary input circuits and output circuits test
AC input circuits test
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of
the protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.
Measuring elements test
Timers test
Metering and recording test
Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
external equipment.
On load test.
Phase sequence check and polarity check.
12.5.1.1 Visual Inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected, contact the vendor. The following items listed is
necessary.
Protection panel
Carefully examine the protection panel, protection equipment inside and other parts inside to
see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
The rated information of other auxiliary protections should be checked to ensure it is correct
for the particular installation.
Panel wiring
Check the conducting wire which is used in the panel to assure that their cross section
meeting the requirement.
Carefully examine the wiring to see that they are no connection failure exists.
Label
Check all the isolator binary inputs, terminal blocks, indicators, switches and push buttons to
make sure that their labels meet the requirements of this project.
Equipment plug-in modules
Check each plug-in module of the equipments on the panel to make sure that they are well
installed into the equipment without any screw loosened.
Earthing cable
Check whether the earthing cable from the panel terminal block is safely screwed to the panel
steel sheet.
Switch, keypad, isolator binary inputs and push button
Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator binary inputs and push buttons
work normally and smoothly.
12.5.1.2 Insulation Test (if required)
Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be
done and they have not been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the isolation with an electronic or brushless insulation
tester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500V, The circuits need to be tested should include:

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
Voltage transformer circuits
Current transformer circuits
DC power supply
Optic-isolated control inputs
Output contacts
Communication ports
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100MΩ at 500V.
Test method:
To unplug all the terminals sockets of this relay, and do the Insulation resistance test for each
circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection.
12.5.1.3 External Wiring
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram and scheme diagram.
Ensure as far as practical that phasing/phase rotation appears to be as expected.
Check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the
customer’s normal practice.
12.5.1.4 Auxiliary Power Supply
The relay only can be operated under the auxiliary power supply depending on the relay’s nominal
power supply rating.
The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Chapter “Technical Data”,
before energizing the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it within the operating range.
Other requirements to the auxiliary power supply are specified in Chapter “Technical Data”. See
this section for further details about the parameters of the power supply.
WARNING! Energize this relay only if the power supply is within the specified operating
ranges in Chapter “Technical Data”.
12.5.2 With the Relay Energized

The following groups of checks verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning correctly
and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay.
The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for these
checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of the
associated circuit breaker.

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
12.5.2.1 Front Panel LCD Display
Connect the relay to DC power supply correctly and turn the relay on. Check program version and
forming time displayed in command menu to ensure that are corresponding to what ordered.
12.5.2.2 Date and Time
If the time and date is not being maintained by substation automation system, the date and time
should be set manually.
Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using menu item “Clock”.
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted on CPU board, the time and date will
be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct
and not need to set again.
To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30s. After being
re-energized, the time and date should be correct.
12.5.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
On power up, the green LED “HEALTHY” should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that
the relay is healthy.
The relay has latched signal relays which remember the state of the trip when the relay was last
energized from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate when the
auxiliary supply is applied. If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before
proceeding with further testing. If the LED successfully reset, the LED goes out. There is no testing
required for that LED because it is known to be operational.
12.5.2.4 Testing the HEALTHY and ALARM LEDs
Apply the rated DC power supply and check that the “HEALTHY” LED is lighting in green. We
need to emphasize that the “HEALTHY” LED is always lighting in operation course except that the
equipment find serious errors in it.
Produce one of the abnormal conditions listed in Chapter “Supervision”, the “MISC_ALM” LED will
light in yellow. When abnormal condition reset, the “MISC_ALM” LED extinguishes.
12.5.2.5 Testing the TRIP LED
The “xx_TRIP” LED can be tested by initiating a manual circuit breaker trip from the relay.
However the “xx_TRIP” LED will operate during the setting checks. Therefore no further testing of
the “TRIP” LED is required at this stage.
12.5.2.6 Testing the AC Current Inputs
This test verified that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Apply rated current to each current transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The measurement accuracy of the protection is 2.5% or 0.02In. However, an additional allowance

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
NOTE! The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent
accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.7 Testing the AC Voltage Inputs
This test verified that the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Apply rated voltage to each voltage transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The measurement accuracy of the relay is 2.5% or 0.1V. However an additional allowance must be
made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
NOTE! The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent
accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.8 Testing the Binary Inputs
This test checks that all the binary inputs on the equipment are functioning correctly.
The binary inputs should be energized one at a time, see external connection diagrams for
terminal numbers.
Ensure that the voltage applied on the binary input must be within the operating range.
The status of each binary input can be viewed using relay menu. Sign “1” denotes an energized
input and sign “0” denotes a de-energized input.
Test method:
To unplug all the terminals sockets of this protective device, and do the insulation resistance test
for each circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection.
12.5.3 Protection Function Checks

The following is an configuration just for testing requirement, the protection function test in this
section is conducted based on this configuration. For a specific project, the actual configuration is
provided by a project configuration manual or configured by users, the concrete pin definition
maybe different.
Assumption: All the binary input modules are NR1504 module. For different type of binary input
module, the pin definition of power supply of opto-coupler are different.

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
Figure 12.5-1 Testing used configuration
Function settings for busbar protection
Voltage concerned functions Enable
Inverted-logic for enabled binary inputs Disable

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
Dual-position for disconnector status Disable
Dual-position for breaker status Enable
Breaker failure protection Enable
Breaker failure protection re-tripping function Enable
Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection Enable
Switch-onto-fault protection of bus coupler or bus section Enable
Feeder end fault protection Enable
Overcurrent protection of bus coupler or bus section Enable
Feeder overcurrent protection Enable
IDMT overcurrent characteristic Enable
Pole disagreement protection of bus coupler or bus section Enable
Feeder pole disagreement protection Enable
Function setting for bay 01
Type of bay 01 One CT BC(BS)
Enable main-transformer bay Disable
Type of bay 02 Feeder
Enable main-transformer bay Enable
Type of bay 03 Feeder
Enable main-transformer bay Disable
Label Settings
Name_Bus1 BB1
Name_Bus2 BB2
Name_Bay01 BC1
Name_Bay02 Fdr01
Name_Bay03 Fdr02
System Settings
U2n_PP_VT 110V
I1n_Bay01 1200A
I1n_Bay02 1200A
I1n_Bay03 1200A
I2n_Ref 1A
In order to convenient to test, the power supply of opto-coupler should be connected as follows.

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
12.5.3.1 Busbar Differential Protection
All relevant settings can be configured temporarily as following for easier test. (Just for reference)
BBP Settings
87B.I_Bias 1.8A
87B.U_VCE 30V
87B.3U0_VCE 8V
87B.U2_VCE 3V
87B.En 1
87B.En_VCE 1
Function Links
Link_87B 1
Link_IntLink_Mode1 0
Change the following settings to avoid effects on steady state differential protection element.
[I_AlmH_CTS]=5A
[I_AlmL_CTS]=5A
All relevant binary inputs can be connected as follows.
0402 [EBI_BBP]
0404 [EBI_IntLink_Mode1]
0401 Opto+
PCS-915
Test source
0702 [BI_89a_BB1_Fdr01]
0704 [BI_89a_BB1_Fdr02]
0705 [BI_89a_BB2_Fdr02]
0701 Opto+
Energize the binary input [EBI_BBP]
Please pay attention that the polarity mark of CT of bus coupler is the same to that of feeder

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
connected to bus 1, but opposite to that connected to bus 2.
Simulate an external fault
1. Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary input [BI_89a_BB1_Fdr01] and
set feeder 02 connecting to BB2 through energizing binary input [BI_89a_BB2_Fdr02].
2. Connect CT of feeder 01 and BC CT with the reverse polarity in series and then connect CT of
feeder 02 with reverse polarity in series (Refer to Figure 12.5-2). Inject a current (For example
ITEST1 = 1∠0 0 ) to make steady-state percentage restraint differential element operate.
3. VCE for BBP will operate. Steady-state percentage restraint differential element does not
operate.
Figure 12.5-2 External fault test
Because check zone differential current is equal to zero, the protection judges that as an external
fault.
Simulate an internal fault (BB1)
1. Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 though energizing binary input [BI_89a_BB1_Fdr01] and set
feeder 02 connecting to BB2 though energizing binary input [BI_89a_BB2_Fdr02]

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
2. Connect CT of feeder 01, BC CT, and CT of feeder 02 with the same polarity in series (Refer
to Figure 12.5-3).
3. Inject a current I TEST1 = 1.0∠0 0 A to make steady-state percentage restraint differential
element operate.
4. VCE for BBP will operate. Steady-state percentage restraint differential element operates with
“BBP_TRIP” LED and “MISC_TRIP” LED turned on simultaneously.
Figure 12.5-3 Internal fault test (BB1)
Inter-connected operation mode
1. Energize the binary input [EBI_IntLink_Mode1]
2. Set the virtual binary input [Link_IntLink_Mode1]=1
3. Repeat the internal fault test mentioned above. Steady-state percentage restraint differential
element will operate to trip feeder 01 and feeder 02, “BBP_TRIP” LED and “MISC_TRIP” LED
will turn on simultaneously. After the test is finished, set the virtual binary input
[Link_IntLink_Mode1]=0 and de-energized the binary input [EBI_IntLink_Mode1].
Check the setting [87B.I_Bias]=1.8A

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
1. Set both feeder 01 and feeder 02 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary input
[BI_89a_BB1_Fdr01] and [BI_89a_BB1_Fdr02].
2. Connect CT of feeder 01 and CT of feeder 02 with the same polarity in series (Refer to Figure
12.5-4)
3. Inject a current ( ITEST1 = [87B.I_Bias] × 0.95/2 = 0.855∠0 0 A), the steady state percentage
restraint differential element will not operate.
4. Inject a current (For example ITEST1 = [87B.I_Bias] × 1.05/2 = 0.945∠00 A), the steady-state
percentage restraint differential element will operate to trip BB1
Inject a current ( ITEST1 = [87B.I_Bias] × 2/2 = 1.8∠0 A), the steady-state percentage restraint
0
5.
differential element will operate to trip BB1. By the timer, users can get the time of BBP
operating to trip BB1.
Figure 12.5-4 Steady-state percentage restraint characteristic test
Voltage control element

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
Figure 12.5-5 Voltage controlled element test
Check Phase Voltage
1. Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 by energizing the binary input [BI_89a_BB1_Fdr01].
2. Inject a current (2A) to CT of feeder 01 and three-phase positive-sequence voltage

(U1=U2=U3=31.5V) to VT of BB1. Steady-state percentage differential element will not
operate.
3. Keep injected current (2A) and change injected value of three-phase positive-sequence
voltage (U1=U2=U3=28.5V). Steady-state percentage differential element will operate.
Check Zero-sequence Voltage
Change the setting [87B.U2_VCE] as 10V
2. Inject a current (2A) to CT of feeder 01 and three-phase positive-sequence voltage (U1=63.5V,

U2=63.5V, U3=55.9V) to VT of BB1. Steady-state percentage differential element will not
operate.
voltage (U1=63.5V, U2=63.5V, U3=55.1V). Steady-state percentage differential element will
operate.
4. Change the setting [87B.U2_VCE] as 3V.
Check Negative-sequence Voltage

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
Change the setting [87B.3U0_VCE] as 20V
2. Inject a current (2A) to CT of feeder 01 and three-phase positive-sequence rated voltage to

VT of BB1. Steady-state percentage differential element will not operate.
not operate.
operate.
5. Change the setting [87B.3U0_VCE] as 8V.
12.5.3.2 BC/BS End Fault Protection
BC breaker is closed
1. Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 through energizing the binary input [BI_89a_BB1_Fdr01]
and set feeder 02 connecting to BB2 through energizing binary input [BI_89a_BB2_Fdr02].
2. Connect CT of feeder 01 and BC CT the opposite polarity in series, and then connect CT of
feeder 02 with reverse polarity in series. Then connect binary output contact of tripping BB2
and three phases normally closed auxiliary contacts of BC breaker [BI_52b_BC1] to test
source. Connect binary output contact of tripping BB1 and binary output contact of tripping
feeder 02 to time meter (Refer to Figure 12.5-6).

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
Figure 12.5-6 BC dead zone protection test (BC breaker is closed)
3. Please set two stages of test source and change from stage 1 to stage 2 to simulate to trip BC
breaker and to make end fault protection operate. (For example STAGE 1:
I TEST1 = 2 ∠ 0 0 A and de-energize three phases normally closed auxiliary contacts of BC
breaker; STAGE 2: I TEST1 = 2 ∠ 0 A and energize three phases normally closed auxiliary
0
contacts of BC breaker)
4. Use binary output contact of tripping BB2 (feeder 02 will be tripped) as a triggering signal to
change the state from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2.
5. Start test from STAGE 1. BBP should operate to trip BC breaker and BB2. The binary output
contact of tripping BB2 (feeder 02 will be tripped) will close and control the test source to
change the state from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, and then BBP will trip BB1 with a time delay for
end fault protection operates to make BC current be excluded from discriminating zone
differential current. “BBP_TRIP” LED and “MISC_TRIP” LED will be turned on.
BC breaker is open

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
1. Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary input [BI_89a_BB1_Fdr01].
2. Energize normally closed auxiliary contacts of BC breaker [BI_52b_BC1].
3. Connect CT of feeder 01 and BC CT with the opposite polarity in series, and connect VTs of
BB1 and BB2. (Refer to Figure 12.5-7)
Figure 12.5-7 BC dead zone protection test (BC breaker is open)
4. Please set two stages of test source and change from stage 1 to stage 2 to make dead zone
protection operate. (For example STAGE 1: ITEST1 = 0 ∠ 0 0 A , U TEST1 = 40 ∠ 0 0 V ; STAGE 2:
ITEST1 = 2 ∠ 0 0 A , U TEST1 = 0 ∠ 0 0 V ).
5. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BBP should operate to trip BC breaker and BB1 with
“BBP_TRIP” LED and “MISC_TRIP” LED turned on.
12.5.3.3 Feeder End Fault Protection

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
Feeder EFP
2. Energize three-phase normally closed auxiliary contacts of breaker of feeder 01

[BI_52b_Fdr01].
3. Inject a current (0.2 IN) to three phases of this feeder.
ITEST1
A 1607
ITEST2
CURRENT CIRCUIT
PCS-915
Test Source A 1609
ITEST3
A 1611
Feeder 01
1608
1610
1612
4. EFP will operate and send transfer trip signal to the remote end with a time delay of 20ms.
Manual Closing Contact
2. Energize three-phase normally closed auxiliary contacts of breaker of feeder 01

[BI_52b_Fdr01].
3. Energize closing binary input [BI_Cls_Fdr01] for 50ms and inject a current (0.2IN) to any
phase of this feeder for 500ms. EFP will not operate.
4. If binary input [BI_Cls_Fdr01] is energized for longer than 10 seconds, an alarm

[Fdr01.Alm_Cls] will be issued and feeder EFP will still be blocked.
Disable Feeder EFP
2. At the beginning, inject three-phase current to any feeder, which is slightly greater than 0.04 IN
(for example, 0.05 IN) and energize three-phase normally closed auxiliary contacts of breaker

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
of feeder 01 [BI_52b_Fdr01].
3. After an alarm [Fdr01.Alm_52b] is issued. When feeder current increases to over 0.2 IN,
feeder EFP will not operate.
12.5.3.4 BC/BS SOTF protection
SOTF Settings
50SOTF.I_Set 1A
50SOTF.En 1
Function Links
BC1.Link_50SOTF 1
0405 [EBI_SOTF_BC]
PCS-915
Test source 0409 [BI_52b_BC1]
0401 Opto+
Check BC SOTF protection
1. Energize the binary input [EBI_SOTF_BC].
2. Connect the BC CT, and connect binary input [BI_52b_BC1]. (Refer to Figure 12.5-8)
Figure 12.5-8 BC SOTF protection test
3. Injecting a current I TEST1 = 0.95 ∠ 0 0 A , BC SOTF protection should not operate.
If injecting a current I TEST1 = 1.05 ∠ 0 0 A , BC SOTF protection should operate to trip BC
breaker with “MISC_TRIP” LED turned on.

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
If injecting a current I TEST1 = 2 ∠ 0 A , BC SOTF protection should operate to trip BC

0
breaker with “MISC_TRIP” LED turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of SOTF
protection operating to trip BC.
BC SOTF protection is only enabled for 300ms if any of the following conditions satisfied, users
must inject the current within 300ms if any of the following conditions satisfied, or BC SOTF
protection should not operate.
The position status of BC/BS breaker changes from open to closed.
BC current changes from being smaller than 0.04IN to being larger than 0.04IN.
Both connected busbars are in service (when busbar phase voltage is greater than 0.3UN or
current of any connected bay is larger than 0.04IN, the busbar is thought as be in service).
12.5.3.5 Overcurrent protection
Takes definite-time overcurrent protection of BC as an example.
OC Settings
BC1.50/51P.I_Set 1A
BC1.50/51G.3I0_Set 1A
BC1.50/51.t_Op 0.5S
BC1.50/51.Opt_Curve 0
50/51.En 1
Function Links
BC1.Link_50/51 1
Energize binary input [EBI_OC].
Connect the BC CT and binary output contact of tripping BC to time meter. (For example Figure
12.5-9)

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
Figure 12.5-9 BC OC protection test
Check the setting [BC1.50/51P.I_Set]=1A
Change the setting [BC1.50/51G.3I0_Set]=4A
1. Inject a current I TEST1 = 0.95 ∠ 0 0 A and BC phase overcurrent protection will not operate.
2. Inject a current I TEST1 = 1.05 ∠ 0 0 A and BC phase overcurrent protection operates to trip BC
breaker with “MISC_TRIP” LED turned on.
Inject a current I TEST1 = 2 ∠ 0 A and BC phase overcurrent protection operates to trip BC

0
3.
breaker with “MISC_TRIP” LED turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of phase
overcurrent protection operating to trip BC.
4. After finishing the test, change the setting [BC1.50/51G.3I0_Set] =1A
Check the setting [BC1.50/51G.3I0_Set]=1A
Change the setting [BC1.50/51P.I_Set]=4A
1. Inject a current I TEST1 = 0.95 ∠ 0 0 A and BC zero-sequence overcurrent protection should not
operate.
2. Inject a current I TEST1 = 1.05 ∠ 0 0 A and BC zero-sequence overcurrent protection should
operate to trip BC breaker with “MISC_TRIP” LED turned on.
Inject a current I TEST1 = 2 ∠ 0 A and BC zero-sequence overcurrent protection operates to

0
3.
trip BC breaker with “MISC_TRIP” LED turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of
zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating to trip BC.
4. After finishing the test, change the setting i.e. [BC1.50/51P.I_Set] =1A

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
12.5.3.6 Pole discrepancy protection
Takes pole discrepancy protection of BC as an example.
PD Settings
62PD.3I0_Set 1A
62PD.I2_Set 0.6A
62PD.t_Op 1s
62PD.En 1
Function Links
BC1.Link_62PD 1
PCS-915
Energize the binary inputs [EBI_PD] and [BI_PD_BC1].
Check settings [62PD.3I0_Set]=1A
Change the setting [62PD.I2_Set]=5A
1. Connect BC CT to test source. Connect binary output contact of BC protection operating to a

time meter (Refer to Figure 12.5-10).
Figure 12.5-10 BC pole discrepancy protection test

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
2. Inject a current I TEST1 = 0.95 ∠ 0 0 A with persisting time longer than the time delay
[62PD.t_Op]. PD protection of BC does not operate.
3. Inject a current I TEST1 = 1.05 ∠ 0 0 A with persisting time longer than the time delay
[62PD.t_Op]. PD protection of BC operate to trip BC breaker, and “MISC_TRIP” LED should

be turned on.
Inject a current I TEST1 = 2 ∠ 0 A with persisting time longer than the time delay
0
4.
[62PD.t_Op]. PD protection of BC operate to trip BC breaker, and “MISC_TRIP” LED should

be turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of PD protection operating to trip BC.
5. After finishing the test, please change the setting [62PD.I2_Set]=1A.
Check the setting i.e. [62PD.I2_Set]=1A
Change the setting [62PD.3I0_Set]=5A
1. Connect BC CT.
Inject a current I TEST1 = 0.6 * 3 * 0.95 = 1.71 ∠ 0 A with persisting time longer than the
0
2.
time delay [62PD.t_Op]. BC PD protection does not operate.
Inject a current I TEST1 = 1.89 ∠ 0 A and persisting time is longer than the time delay
0
3.
[62PD.t_Op]. BC PD protection should operate to trip BC breaker, and “MISC_TRIP” LED

should be turned on.
4. Inject a current
I TEST1 = 3.6 ∠ 0 0 A and persisting time is longer than the time delay
[62PD.t_Op]. BC PD protection should operate to trip BC breaker, and “MISC_TRIP” LED

should be turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of PD protection operating to trip BC.
5. After finishing the test, please change the setting [62PD.3I0_Set]=0.6A.
6. After finishing all test of BC PD protection, de-energize the two binary inputs [EBI_PD] and
[BI_PD_BC1].
12.5.3.7 BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection
BC BFP Settings
BC.50BF.I_Set 1A
BC.50BF.t_TrpBB 0.5s
OC Settings
50/51.En_Init50BF 1
PD Settings

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
62PD.En_Init50BF 1
The connection is shown as follows.
Figure 12.5-11 BC BFP test
Check external binary input initiating BC BFP
1. Connect BC CT to test source
2. STAGE 1: I TEST1 = 0 ∠ 0 0 A and binary inputs [BI_BFI_BC1_1] and [BI_BFI_BC1_2] are
energized; STAGE 2: I TEST1 = 0.95 ∠ 0 A

0
and binary inputs [BI_BFI_BC1_1] and
[BI_BFI_BC1_2] are energized; Persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, BC BFP will not operate.
energized; STAGE 2: I TEST1 = 1.05 ∠ 0 0 A and binary inputs [BI_BFI_BC1_1] and
test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, BC BFP operates to trip BB1 and BB2. “BFP_TRIP” LED and
“MISC_TRIP” LED should be turned on.
energized; STAGE 2: I TEST1 = 2 ∠ 0 0 A and binary inputs [BI_BFI_BC1_1] and
test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BC BFP will operate to trip BB1 and BB2. “BFP_TRIP” LED
and “MISC_TRIP” LED should be turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of BC BFP
operating to trip BB2.
Check BBP initiating BC BFP
Change the setting [87B.En]=1, [Link_87B]=1
Energize the function binary input [EBI_BBP]
2. Simulating an internal fault on BB1 (please refer to Section 12.5.3.1).
3. Inject a current I TEST1 = 2 ∠ 0 0 A and the persisting time is longer than the setting
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB].
4. BBP protection should operate to trip BB1 and BC breaker. “BBP_TRIP” LED and
“MISC_TRIP” LED will be turned on first. Then after a delay [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB], BC BFP will
operate to trip BB1 and BB2, and “BFP_TRIP” LED will be turned on.
5. After finishing the test, change the setting [87B.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[EBI_BBP].
Check OC protection initiating BC BFP
Change the two settings [50/51.En]=1, [BC1.Link_50/51]=1
Energize the binary input [EBI_OC]
2. Simulating an internal fault to make OC protection of BC operates (please refer to Section

12.5.3.5).

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB].
4. OC protection of BC will operate to trip BC breaker. “MISC_TRIP” LED will be turned on first.
Then after a delay [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB], BC BFP will operate to trip BB1 and BB2, and
“BFP_TRIP” LED will be turned on.
5. After finishing the test, change the setting [50/51.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[EBI_OC].
Check PD protection initiating BC BFP
Change the two settings [62PD.En]=1, [BC1.Link_62PD]=1
Energize the binary input [EBI_PD]
2. Simulating an internal fault to make PD protection of BC operates (please refer to Section

12.5.3.6).
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB].
4. PD protection of BC will operate to trip BC breaker. “MISC_TRIP” LED will be turned on first.
Then after a delay [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB], BC BFP will operate to trip BB1 and BB2, and
“BFP_TRIP” LED will be turned on.
5. After finishing the test, change the setting [62PD.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[EBI_PD].
12.5.3.8 Feeder Breaker failure protection
Fdr BFP Settings
50BF.t_ReTrp 0.15S
50BF.t_TrpBC 0.25S
50BF.t_TrpBB 0.35S
50BF.U_VCE 30V
50BF.3U0_VCE 8V
50BF.U2_VCE 3V
Bay02.50BF.I_Set 1.5A
Bay02.50BF.3I0_Set 1A
Bay02.50BF.I2_Set 1A
Bay02.50BF.En_3I0 0
Bay02.50BF.En_I2 0

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
Bay02.50BF.Dis_VCE 1
50BF.En 1
OC Settings
50/51.En_Init50BF 1
PD Settings
62PD.En_Init50BF 1
Function Links
Link_50BF 1
Energize the binary input [EBI_BFP]
Set feeder 01 and feeder 02 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary inputs
[BI_89a_BB1_Fdr01] and [BI_89a_BB1_Fdr02].
Connect the VT of BB1 and CT of feeder 01 to test source (Refer to Figure 12.5-12).

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
Start
t2
Stop
Start
t1
Stop
Start
t3
Stop
Figure 12.5-12 BFP test
Check external binary input initiating BFP
STAGE 1: I TEST1 = 0 ∠ 0 A and binary input [BI_BFI_Fdr01] is de-energized; STAGE 2:

0
1.
I TEST1 = 1.425 ∠ 0 0 A and binary input [BI_BFI_Fdr01] is energized. Persisting time of
STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, feeder BFP will
not operate.

0
2.
I TEST1 = 1.575 ∠ 0 0 A and binary input [BI_BFI_Fdr01] is energized. Persisting time of
STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, feeder BFP
operates to re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays.
“BFP_TRIP” LED and “MISC_TRIP” will be turned on.

0
3.

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
I TEST1 = 3∠ 0 0 A and binary input [BI_BFI_Fdr01] is energized. Persisting time of STAGE 1
and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, feeder BFP operates to
re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. “BFP_TRIP” LED
and “MISC_TRIP” will be turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of feeder BFP
operating to re-trip feeder 01 (t1), trip BC breaker (t2) and trip BB1 (t2).
Check BBP initiating BFP
Change the two settings [87B.En]=1, [Link_87B]=1
Energize the binary input [EBI_BBP]
1. Simulating an internal fault on BB1.
Inject a current I TEST1 = 3∠ 0 A and the persisting time is set as 1s.

0
2.
3. BBP protection should operate to trip BB1 and BC breaker. “BBP_TRIP” LED and
“MISC_TRIP” LED will be turned on first. Then feeder BFP operates to re-trip feeder 01, trip
BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. “BFP_TRIP” LED will be turned on.
4. After finishing the test, change the setting [87B.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[EBI_BBP].
Check OC protection initiating BFP
Change the two settings [50/51.En]=1 and [Fdr01.Link_50/51]=1
Energize the binary input [EBI_OC]
1. Simulating an internal fault to make OC protection of feeder 01 operates (please refer to

Section 12.5.3.5).

0
2.
3. OC protection of feeder 01 will operate to trip feeder 01 breaker. Then feeder BFP operates to
re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. “BFP_TRIP” LED will
be turned on.
4. After finishing the test, change the setting [50/51.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[EBI_OC].
Check PD protection initiating BFP
Change the two settings [62PD.En]=1 and [Fdr01.Link_62PD]=1
Energize the binary input [EBI_PD]
1. Simulating an internal fault to make PD protection of feeder 01 operates (please refer to

Section 12.5.3.6).

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning

0
2.
3. PD protection of feeder 01 will operate to trip feeder 01 breaker. Then feeder BFP operates to
re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. “BFP_TRIP” LED will
be turned on.
4. After finishing the test, change the setting [62PD.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[EBI_PD].
Check VCE of BFP
Check Phase Voltage
Change the logic setting [Bay02.50BF.Dis_VCE] as “0”
1. De-energize the binary input [BI_Rls_VCE_BFP_Fdr01].
2. Set three stages: STAGE1: U TEST1 = 63.5 ∠ 0 0 V , U TEST2 = 63.5 ∠ − 120 0 V
U TEST3 = 63.5 ∠120 0 V , I TEST1 = 0 ∠ 0 0 A and binary input [BI_BFI_Fdr01] is de-energized;
STAGE2: U TEST1 = 31.5 ∠ 0 V , U TEST2 = 31.5 ∠ − 120 V , U TEST3 = 31.5 ∠120 V ,

0 0 0
I TEST1 = 2.5 ∠ 0 0 A and binary input [BI_BFI_Fdr01] is energized;

0 0 0
I TEST1 = 2.5 ∠ 0 0 A and binary input [BI_BFI_Fdr01] is energized.
3. The persisting time of STAGE 1, STAGE 2 and STAGE 3 are set as 1s.
4. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BFP will not operate. Sequentially test from STAGE 2 to
STAGE 3. BFP operates.
Check Zero-sequence Voltage
Change the setting [50BF.U2_VCE] as 10V

0 0 0
I TEST1 = 2.5 ∠ 0 0 A and binary input [BI_BFI_Fdr01] is energized; STAGE3:

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
U TEST1 = 63.5 ∠ 0 0 V , U TEST2 = 63.5 ∠ − 120 0 V , U TEST3 = 55.1 ∠120 0 V ,
5. Change the setting [50BF.U2_VCE] as 3V.
Check Negative-sequence Voltage
Change the setting [50BF.3U0_VCE] as 20V.

0 0 0
I TEST1 = 2.5 ∠ 0 0 A and binary input [BI_BFI_Fdr01] is energized; STAGE3:
U TEST1 = 63.5 ∠ 0 0 V , U TEST2 = 63.5 ∠ − 120 0 V , U TEST3 = 54.05 ∠120 0 V ,
5. Change the setting [50BF.3U0_VCE] as 8V.
Check external binary input [BI_Rls_VCE_BFP_Fdr01] releasing the VCE of BFP
1. Set two stages: STAGE1: U TEST1 = 63.5 ∠ 0 0 V , U TEST2 = 63.5 ∠ − 120 0 V
STAGE2: U TEST1 = 63.5 ∠ 0 0 V , U TEST2 = 63.5 ∠ − 120 0 V , U TEST3 = 63.5 ∠120 0 V ,
I TESY1 = 2.5 ∠ 0 0 A and binary input [BI_BFI_Fdr01] is energized.
2. The persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s.

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
3. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BFP should not operate.
4. Energize the binary input [BI_Rls_VCE_BFP_Fdr01] and repeat the above test, BFP will
operate.
12.5.4 Print Fault Report

In order to acquire the details of protection operation, it is convenient to print the fault report of
protection device. The printing work can be easily finished when operator presses the print button
on panel of protection device to energize binary input [BI_Print] or operate control menu. What
should be noticed is that only the latest fault report can be printed if operator presses the print
button. A complete fault report includes the content shown as follows.
1) Trip event report
2) Binary input when protection devices start
3) Self-check and the transition of binary input in the process of devices start
4) Fault wave forms compatible with COMTRADE
5) The setting value when the protection device trips
12.5.5 On-load Checks

The objectives of the on-load checks are:
Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct.
Measure the magnitude of on-load current and voltage (if applicable).
Check the polarity of each current transformer.
However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the
tenderization of the plant being protected.
Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has
been removed to allow testing.
If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to
perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in
accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Confirm current and voltage
transformer wiring.
12.5.6 Final Checks

After the above tests are completed, remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been
necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to perform the
wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with
the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Ensure that the protection has been restored to service.
If the protection is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning
breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. If a test block is installed, remove the
test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put into service.
Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records and alarms have been cleared
and LED’s has been reset before leaving the protection.

Date: 2011-05-25
12 Commissioning

Date: 2011-05-25
13 Maintenance
13 Maintenance
Table of Contents
13 Maintenance ................................................................................ 13-a
13.1 Appearance Check ...................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Failure Tracing And Repair ......................................................................... 13-1
13.3 Replace Failed Modules ............................................................................. 13-1
13.4 Cleaning ....................................................................................................... 13-3
13.5 Storage ......................................................................................................... 13-3

Date: 2011-05-24
13 Maintenance

Date: 2011-05-24
13 Maintenance
NR numerical relay PCS-915 is designed to require no special maintenance. All measurement and
signal processing circuit are fully solid state. All input modules are also fully solid state. The output
relays are hermetically sealed.
Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the output
relays, hardware and software defects are automatically detected and reported. The
self-monitoring ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows for a corrective
rather than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks in short intervals are
not required.
Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is detected. If a problem
is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides alarm messages.
13.1 Appearance Check

1. The relay case should be clean without any dust stratification. Case cover should be sealed
well. No component has any mechanical damage and distortion, and they should be firmly fixed in
the case. Relay terminals should be in good condition. The keys on the front panel with very good
feeling can be operated flexibly.
2. It is only allowed to plug or withdraw relay board when the supply is reliably switched off.
Never allow the CT secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be opened while the primary
system is live when withdrawing an AC module. Never try to insert or withdraw the relay board
when it is unnecessary.
3. Check weld spots on PCB whether they are well soldered without any rosin joint. All dual
inline components must be well plugged.
13.2 Failure Tracing And Repair

Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued and the failure is indicated on
the front panel with LED indicators and LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the “Superv Events” screen on the LCD.
When a failure is detected during regular testing, confirm the following:
Test circuit connections are correct
Modules are securely inserted in position
Correct DC power voltage is applied
Correct AC inputs are applied
Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual
13.3 Replace Failed Modules

If the failure is identified to be in the relay module and the user has spare modules, the user can

Date: 2011-05-24
13 Maintenance
recover the protection by replacing the failed modules.
Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is
not recommended.
Check that the replacement module has an identical module name (AI, PWR, CPU, SIG, BI, BO,
etc.) and hardware type-form as the removed module. Furthermore, the CPU module replaced
should have the same software version. In addition, the AI and PWR module replaced should have
the same ratings.
The module name is indicated on the top front of the module. The software version is indicated in
LCD menu “Version Info”.
Caution!
When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band
and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic
components could suffer damage. After replacing the CPU module, check the settings.
1) Replacing a module
Switch off the DC power supply
Disconnect the trip outputs
Short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage inputs
Unscrew the module.
Warning!
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power
supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
2) Replacing the Human Machine Interface Module (front panel)
Open the relay front panel
Unplug the ribbon cable on the front panel by pushing the catch outside.
Detach the HMI module from the relay
Attach the replacement module in the reverse procedure.
3) Replacing the AI, PWR, CPU, BI or BO module
Unscrew the module connector
Unplug the connector from the target module.
Unscrew the module.
Pull out the module

Date: 2011-05-24
13 Maintenance
Inset the replacement module in the reverser procedure.
After replacing the CPU module, input the application-specific setting values again.
Warning!
Units and modules may only be replaced while the supply is switched off and only by
appropriately trained and qualified personnel. Strictly observe the basic precautions to
guard against electrostatic discharge.
Warning!
When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band
and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic
components could suffer damage. After replacing the CPU module, check the settings.
Danger!
After replacing modules, be sure to check that the same configuration is set as before the
replacement. If this is not the case, there is a danger of the unintended operation of
switchgear taking place or of protections not functioning correctly. Persons may also be
put in danger.
13.4 Cleaning
Before cleaning the relay, ensure that all AC/DC supplies, current transformer connections are
isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock whilst cleaning. Use a smooth cloth to clean
the front panel. Do not use abrasive material or detergent chemicals.
13.5 Storage
The spare relay or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC standard
60255-1 the storage temperature should be from -40oC to +70oC, but the temperature of from 0oC
to +40oC is recommended for long-term storage.

Date: 2011-05-24
13 Maintenance

Date: 2011-05-24
Table of Contents
14 Decommissioning and Disposal ................................................ 14-a
14.1 Decommissioning ....................................................................................... 14-1
14.2 Disposal ....................................................................................................... 14-1

Date: 2011-05-24

Date: 2011-05-24
14.1 Decommissioning
1. Switching off
To switch off the PCS-915, switch off the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply.
2. Disconnecting Cables
Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational
department.
Danger!
Before disconnecting the power supply cables that connected with the DC module of the
PCS-915, make sure that the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply is
switched off.
Danger!
Before disconnecting the cables that are used to connect analog input module with the
primary CTs and VTs, make sure that the circuit breaker for the primary CTs and VTs is
switched off.
3. Dismantling
The PCS-915 rack may now be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may
also be removed.
Danger!
When the station is in operation, make sure that there is an adequate safety distance to
live parts, especially as dismantling is often performed by unskilled personnel.
14.2 Disposal
In every country there are companies specialized in the proper disposal of electronic waste.
Note!
Strictly observe all local and national regulations when disposing of the device.

Date: 2011-05-24

Date: 2011-05-24

In the latest version of the instruction manual, several descriptions on existing features have been
modified.
Manual version and modification history records
Manual Version Software

Date Description of change
Source New Version
R1.00 R1.00 2011-05-25 Form the original manual.

Date: 2011-05-24

Date: 2011-05-24

PCS-915 Bus Bar Relay

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PCS-915 Bus Bar Relay

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PCS-915

Centralized Busbar Protection

NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Health and Safety

Qualified personnel are individuals who:

Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

Instructions and Warnings

PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection i

ii PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection

The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed

Printed circuit board

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

Version: R1.00 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

69 Suyuan Avenue. Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China

P/N: EN_YJBH5310.0086.0001 Tel: +86-25-87178185, Fax: +86-25-87178208

Website: www.nrelect.com, www.nari-relays.com

Copyright © NR 2011. All rights reserved Email: NR_TechSupport@nari-relays.com

We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.

PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection iii

All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below:

5 Meaurement and Recording

8 Human Machine Interface

iv PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection

14 Decommissioning and Disposal

15 Manual Version History

Typographic and Graphical Conventions

The following symbols are used in drawings:

Binary signal via opto-coupler

Input signal from comparator with setting

Input signal of logic setting for function enabling

PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection v

Input of binary signal except those signals via opto-coupler

Input of other signal

Time (optional definite-time or inverse-time characteristic)

Timer [delay pickup (10ms), delay dropoff (0ms), non-settable]

Timer (delay pickup, settable)

Timer (delay dropoff, settable)

Timer (delay pickup, delay dropoff, settable)

Timer (inverse-time characteristic)

---xxx is the symbol

vi PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection

PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection 1-a

1-b PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection

PCS-915 provides the following functions

Busbar differential protection (87B)

Steady-state percentage restraint differential protection

DPFC percentage restraint differential protection

Bus coupler protection

Breaker failure protection (50BF)

End zone fault protection (50DZ)

Pole disagreement protection (62PD)

PCS-915 Centralized Busbar Protection 1-1

Switch-onto-fault protection (50SOTF)

Overcurrent protection (50/51)

Breaker failure protection (50BF)

End zone fault protection (50DZ)

Pole disagreement protection (62PD)

Overcurrent protection (50/51)

DPFC is the abbreviation of “Deviation of Power Frequency Component”. When a fault

Dynamic busbar replica

Disconnector position alarm

1. Protection and Control

Parallel calculation of double DSP system

Independent fault detector element